Home

BMW 135i Owner's Manual

1. I cene BY Flash when locking EY Flash when unlocking O Acoustic confirm when locking O Acoustic confirm when unlocking 7 Select the desired signal 8 Press the controller LY The signals are switched on Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves If this occurs unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key In vehicles without an alarm system or conve nient access only the driver s door can be unlocked and locked using the integrated key in the door lock When the driver s and front passenger s doors are closed you can lock and unlock both doors the luggage compartment lid and the fuel filler door using the button for the central locking system in the interior refer to page 32 If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control the battery in the remote control is dis charged Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery refer to page 28 The remote control for convenient access contains a battery that may have to be changed refer to page 37 ir e tea mur e O For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communications Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions
2. convenient operation 30 convenient operation with convenient access 36 opening closing 38 pinch protection system 39 Windows defrosting and removing condensation 100 Windshield cleaning 64 defrosting and removing condensation 100 Windshield wash filling capacity reservoir 239 Windshield washer reservoir refer to Washer fluid filler neck 64 Windshield washer system 63 washer fluid 64 washer nozzles 64 Windshield wiper blades changing 223 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Windshield wipers refer to Wiper system 63 Winter tires 211 setting speed limit 79 storage 211 Wiper blade replacement 223 Wiper system 63 With highways in navigation 134 Word matching principle for navigation 135 Wrench screwdriver refer to Onboard tool kit 223 X Xenon lamps replacing bulb 223 259 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG S O Gen 3 ad Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG O More about BMW bmwusa com nline Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG The Ultimate Driving Machine 01 41 0014 954 ue iDrive
3. tone control 151 volume 151 CD player 163 compressed audio files 163 controls 150 fast forward reverse 167 playing a track 165 random order 166 repeating a track 166 selecting a track 164 switching on off 150 tone control 151 volume 151 Center armrest 107 Center brake lamp replacing bulb 226 Center console refer to Around the center console 14 Central key refer to Integrated key remote control 28 Central locking 30 50 Central locking from inside 32 from outside 29 Central locking system 29 convenient access 36 Changes technical refer to For your own safety 5 Changing the language on the Control Display 80 Changing wheels 226 Chassis number refer to Engine compartment 213 Check Control 77 Check Control messages 78 Checking oil level 213 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 56 Child restraint systems 55 Child seats 55 Chrome parts 222 Chrome polish 222 Cigarette lighter 108 Cleaning headlamps 64 washer fluid 64 Cleaning your BMW refer to Care 219 Climate 98 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Clock 67 12h 24h format 76 setting time 75 Closing from inside 32 from outside 29 Clothes hooks 107 Cold start refer to Starting the engine 59 Combination instrument refer to Instrument cluster 12 Comfort access refer to Convenient access 36 Comfort area ref
4. Phone a Co nicer Get Start service Select Concierge and press the control ler i BMW Assist Roadside Assistance Start service Select Start service and press the con troller The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with a BMW Assist Concierge Select a received message if applicable and press the controller i BMW Assist d Concierge Start service Select Options and press the controller REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA 01234 1234567890 Select a menuitem Press Call to make a telephone call pre requisite for this is that your Bluetooth mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle Press Select as destination to transfer the address to the navigation system for desti nation guidance If the services offered by BMW Assist change you will be notified In that event you may update the service functions Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu 195 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Display op a Into sources Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Turn the controller until BMW Service set tings is selected and press the controller Ven Settings VS Vehicle Tires 2 Language Units v Time
5. gt The low beams remain switched on inde _ pendent of the ambient lighting condi tions when you switch on the fog lamps lt The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a Substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions For example the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather To avoid safety risks you should always switch on the low beam headlamps manually under these conditions 4 Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle Activating deactivating welcome lamps iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 5 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller Door locks TPM Te O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 240 s O Welcome light 6 Select Welcome light and press the con troller LE The welcome lamps are switched on The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Pathw
6. 35 240 32 220 32 220 32 220 35 240 Q 35 240 38 260 35 240 39 270 35 240 38 260 35 240 39 270 Traveling speeds including those exceeding LE 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 33 230 33 230 33 230 Q 35 240 35 240 35 240 35 240 35 240 36 250 36 250 36 250 100 mph 160 km h RAR TO 32 220 35 240 35 240 35 240 32 220 36 250 36 250 36 250 Q 39 270 42 290 39 270 39 270 39 270 44 300 44 300 44 300 Convertible tire inflation pressures for the 135i Tire size All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 205 50 R17 89 H M S Front 215 40 R 18 85 Y Rear 245 35 R 18 88 Y with Sports package 205 50 R 17 89 H M S Front 215 40 R 18 85 Y Rear 245 35 R 18 88 Y More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239 Pressure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to a max of 100 mph 160 km h RAR TO 33 220 39 270 33 220 39 270 38 260 39 270 38 260 39 270 Traveling speeds including those exceeding LE 32 220 39 270 33 230 38 260 oe 35 240 39 270 36 250 38 260 100 mph 160 km h Rikio 36 250 39 270 38 260 39 270 207 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG eo 42 290 39 270 45 310 45 3
7. 5 Attach the headlamp cover Xenon headlamps Parking lamps roadside parking lamps daytime running lamps H8 bulb 35 watts The figure shows the right hand headlamp 1 Remove the headlamp cover 2 Turn the bulb see arrow and remove it 3 Pull off the connector and replace the bulb Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 4 5 Attach the connector insert the bulb and turn it all the way in the opposite direction Attach the headlamp cover Corner illuminating lamps H3 bulb 55 watts The figure shows the right hand headlamp a 2 6 Remove the top headlamp cover using the screwdriver to push the detents to one side IL Turn the bulb holder see arrow and remove it a Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off the connector Replace the bulb and attach the connector Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction Attach the headlamp cover Turn signals front PY21W Silver Vision bulb 21 watts The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover in the wheel arch Turn the respective wheel inwards Using a coin turn both locks of the cover all the way to the left arrows 1 and remove the cover Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove it arrow 2 Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the right for removal and replacement Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning it to the rig
8. Dial Adjusting the volume of the instructions You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system nm Wl i r F a UT oN 4 LE a j Turn the button during an instruction This volume for the instructions is maintained even if the other audio sources are set to mini mum volume The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Calling Dialing phone numbers m l 1 2 Say the phone number For telephone calls abroad say Plus lt and then the country code 3 Diak The connection to the desired subscriber is established Dial number 188 Dialing numbert Correcting phone numbers After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system you can delete this sequence of digits we Correct number The digits are deleted The command Correct number can be repeated as often as you like Deleting phone numbers wy Deletes All digits entered up to this point are deleted Voice phone book The phone book entries can be called up auto matically from your mobile phone s memory Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established wr 1 Dialnamet The dialog for selecting an entry is opened 2 Say the name when prompted 3 Confirm the prompt with Yes Redialing The Redialt command calls up Redial Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Notes To re
9. Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http Awww safercar gov Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect to Transport Canada Defect Investigations and Recalls may call 1 800 333 0510 toll free from anywhere in Canada or 1 613 993 9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries or contact Transport Canada by mail at Transport Can ada ASFAD Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks Street Ottawa ON K1A ON5 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www tc gc ca 7 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no C Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Cockpit Cockpi Around the steering wheel controls and displays i 2 18 17 16 13 15 14 13 Convertible opening and closing 6 windows jointly 38 raring tamps 8 o ios Convertible opening and closing rear windows 38 Lowbeams 93 Automatic headlamp control 92 Adaptive Head Light 94 Opening and closing front windows 38 A Lb A A AWA S O 4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out 51 5 Adjusting exterior mirrors automatic curb monitor 51 10 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG W ET Fog lamps 95 Turn signals 62 High beams head
10. We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly Your BMW is covered by the following warran ties gt New Vehicle Limited Warranty Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty gt gt gt Federal Emissions Performance Warranty gt California Emission Control System Limited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying BMW of North America LLC P O Box 1227 Westwood New Jersey 07675 1227 Telephone 1 800 831 1117 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or BMW of North America LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http Awww safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW
11. fuel filler door 202 glass roof 40 luggage compartment lid 33 Electronic brake force distribution EBV 82 Electronic oil level check 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Electronic Stability Program ESP refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82 Emergency operation refer to Manual operation door lock 32 fuel filler door 202 glass roof 40 transmission lock automatic transmission 62 Emergency release luggage compartment lid 34 Emergency Request 229 Emergency services refer to Roadside Assistance 229 Enabled services 196 Enabled TeleServices 194 End call 183 Energy saving saving fuel 114 Engine breaking in 114 data 236 speed 236 starting 59 starting convenient access 36 switching off 59 Engine compartment 213 Engine coolant refer to Coolant 216 Engine oil adding 215 additives 215 BMW Maintenance System 217 checking level 213 intervals between changes refer to Service requirements 72 specified engine oils 215 Engine oil level 214 Engine output refer to Engine data 236 Engine speed refer to Engine data 236 Engine starting refer to Starting the engine 59 Enter address 124 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Entering a destination 124 Entering a destination country 124 Entering a house number or intersection 126 Entering an inte
12. 2 1470 3 960 4 1480 Press the controller Other menu items are displayed 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Autostore and press the controller Select Store and press the controller i m EM 4 Manual b 1020 7 1680 a 830 The display of the stations with the strongest Presets is displayed reception is updated The frequencies of the stations are displayed Turn the controller until the desired mem ory location is selected Press the controller The station is stored 2E FM 4 Presets Select FM or AM and press the control ler Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is chosen and press the controller Select the desired frequency or station a Set is selected The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time ic FM With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond the stations are stored for the remote control currently in use a Manual You can store a station on the programmable memory keys refer also to page Select a station Press the controller TE Press the desired key for a Other menu items are displayed longer period Select Presets and press the controller Select the desired station Set is selected Press the controller Other menu items are displayed 156 Onli
13. 32 220 D 35 240 35 240 35 240 35 240 100 mph 160 km h ALL 9 35 240 35 240 35 240 35 240 Pressure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to a max of 100 mph 160 km h hihi 33 230 36 250 P 36 250 36 250 More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239 Traveling speeds including those exceeding SLON 33 230 36 250 36 250 36 250 100 mph 160 km h 6 42 290 42 290 42 290 42 290 titi P P 38 260 38 260 205 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 42 290 42 290 gt z O Wheels and tires Convertible tire inflation pressures for the 128i Tire size All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature without Sports package 205 55 R 1691 H M S 205 50 R 17 89 H M S Front 205 50 R 17 89 V Rear 225 45 R 17 91 V Front 215 40 R 18 85 Y Rear 245 35 R 18 88 Y with Sports package 205 55 R 16 91 H M S 205 50 R 17 89 H M S Front 205 50 R 17 89 V Rear 225 45 R 17 91 V Front 215 40 R 18 85 Y Rear 245 35 R 18 88 Y More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239 206 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Pressure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to a max of 100 mph 160 km h ALL 32 220 32 220 32 220
14. Deactivating Push the switch to the position for the passen ger side mirror arrow 2 Interior rearview mirror mr Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head lamps of cars behind you when driving at night Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Interior and exterior mirrors automatic dimming feature The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror One photo cellis in the mirror frame see arrow the other is on the back of the mirror In order to ensure that the system functions correctly keep the photo cells clean do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror Steering wheel Adjustments Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move ment 4 gt 1 Fold the lever down 2 Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated posi tion 3 Swing the lever back up Do not use force to swing the lever back up otherwise the mechanism will be damaged lt 4 Programmable buttons on the steering wheel You can program the buttons individually These settings are stored for the remote con trol currently in use iDrive for operating pri
15. E Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors indicates that Check Control messages have been stored You can view the Check Control messages whenever it is convenient for you v io a O Explanatory text messages A Climate 4 gt Navigation Entertainment Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps ww Washer fluid insufficient washer fluid in fluid 6 reservoir Refill as soon as possible refer to Owner s Manual For most Check Control messages you can view more information later e g regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond refer to the information provided below In urgent cases this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on To exit the displayed information Select the 443 arrow and press the controller 77 B Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control Hiding Check Control messages Press the button in the turn indicator lever Some Check Control messages are displayed until the respective malfunction has been recti fied They cannot be hidden If several malfunc tions occur at the same time they are displayed In succession E They are marked with the symbol shown A here Other Check Control messages are automati cally hidde
16. Mounting points The mounting points are located under the pro tective covers in the bumper Loading the rear mounted luggage rack You should always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 239 119 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Ce Q D gt D m dition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Starting the navigation system Starting the navigation system Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter Navigation DVD The navigation system requires a special navi gation DVD You can obtain the latest version at your BMW center Inserting navigation DVD A 1 Use the lower drive for navigation DVDs 1 Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up The navigation DVD is pulled in automati cally 2 Wait for several seconds to allow the con tents of the DVD to be read in Removing navigation DVD 1 ESS Press button 1 The DVD emerges slightly from the drive 2 Remove the DVD If the DVD is not ejected the drive may be blocked In this case a message will appear on the Control Display 122 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Destination entry In enterin
17. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played Bluetooth name of your BMW BMW 76002 Start pairing your Bluetooth phone Please enter a passkey PIN when asked to do so Additional Information IS contained in the owner s manual LA 178 Further steps must be carried out with the mobile phone and vary depending on the model Please refer to your mobile phone s operating instructions e g under the topics of Searching for a Bluetooth device Linking or Pairing The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also appears on the mobile phone display Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display Depending on your mobile phone you will see messages first on the mobile phone display or on the iDrive requesting you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey previously determined by you Enter the Bluetooth passkey Depending on the mobile phone you will have approx 30 seconds to enter your Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the Control Display 0123456 Confirm passkey 456 Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top select Confirm passkey and press the controller Wait several seconds until the Communi cation menu is displayed The next time you use the mobile phone inside the vehicle it will be recognized within no more than 2 minutes as long as the engine Is running or the ignition is switched on With some mobile phones it may be nec essary to m
18. The same break in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle s operating life Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on several factors You can lower fuel consump tion and the environmental impact by taking certain measures adjusting your driving style and having the vehicle serviced regularly Remove any unneeded cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption Remove any mounted parts after you have finished using them Remove unneeded additional mirrors the roof rack and the rear luggage rack after use Mounted parts affect the vehicle s aerodynam ics and increase fuel consumption Close the windows and glass roof An open glass roof or window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consump tion Check tire inflation pressure regularly Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before embarking on a long journey and correct it if necessary Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tire wear Set off immediately Do not let the engine warm up while the car is still standing but set off immediately at moder ate engine speed This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Drive defensively Avoid unnecessary acceleration an
19. Vehicle Hres Phone vm Language Units AS Time Date Select BMW Service settings and press the controller Service Request Start service REXFORD DRIVE a Settings i PN BEVERLY HILLS CA V Vehicle Tires 7 Language Units Select Customer Relations A Time Date Ma Traffic info settings 4 ST BMW Assist Mi Service Request Start service fn Bluetooth Select Enabled TeleServices and press the controller REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA a Assist profile Vptions Press the controller Activated services AONE SS eae Select Start service and press the con service Request troller Customer Relations _ The BMW Assist Response Center will connect Auto Request you with BMW Customer Relations 194 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG When you call the BMW Assist Concierge you can obtain information about e g current events gas stations or hotels as well as receive the corresponding telephone numbers and addresses Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service Concierge service requires additional enabling by the BMW Assist Response Center Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forwards to select Communication If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until BMW Assist is selected and press the controller
20. gt Estimated time of arrival at destination gt Manually enter a distance in the com puter refer to information further below gt Enter a destination in the navigation sys tem refer to page 123 V Cruising range gt Distance to destination gt Manually enter a distance in the com puter refer to information further below gt Enter a destination in the navigation sys tem refer to page 123 gt Average speed gt Average fuel consumption Resetting values You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption 69 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG ir e L mur e O Everything under control 1 Select the respective menu item and press the controller 2 Press the controller again to confirm your selection Entering a distance manually 1 Select Distance to dest and press the controller F a Car Data i 4 Onboard info Arrival time Range Distance to dest Speed Consumption 2 Turnthe controller to select the distance to your destination 3 Press the controller to apply the setting The distance is automatically entered during destination guidance Trip computer 1 Open the start menu 2 Callup Navigation 3 Select Car Data and press the controller A Select Trip computer and press the con troller i a Car Data u Onboard info Limit b Set 4 10 pm 05 40 hr 2 4 mis Depa i LITE Duration
21. gt This device must not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation D Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 4 31 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing Opening and closing Using the door lock ve You can set the way in which the car is unlocked refer to page 29 gt If the vehicle is not equipped with an _ alarm system or convenient access only the driver s door is locked via the door lock 4 To lock both doors the fuel filler door and the luggage compartment lid together 1 With the doors closed lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking sys tem in the interior refer to page 32 2 Unlock and open the driver s or front pas senger s door refer to page 33 3 Lock the vehicle gt Lock the driver s door using the inte grated key in the door lock or gt press down the lock button of the front passenger s door and close the door from the outside Convenient operation If the car is equipped with an alarm system or convenient access you can also control the power windows and the glass roof in the coupe or the convertible top in the convertible via the door lock Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking During each closin
22. 10 Central locking system 32 Can be turned pressed or moved horizon 11 Automatic climate control tally in four directions F Air distribution to the 19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17 windshield 98 20 Drive for navigation DVD 122 Air distribution to the upper body area 98 21 Programmable memory keys 21 F o 7 22 Switching entertainment audio sources on Va Air distribution to the footwell 98 off and adjusting volume 150 AUTO Automatic air distribution and flow 73 Drive for audio CD 163 rate 99 Cooling function 100 Automatic recirculated air control tA auc 99 tJ Recirculated air mode 99 gr Maximum cooling 98 Bird Residual heat mode 100 Air flow rate 99 Rear window defroster 100 TTY Defrosting windows 100 12 Ejecting audio CD 150 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG iDrive iDrive iDrive integrates the functions of a large num basic menu navigation The control of the indi ber of switches This allows these functions to vidual functions is described in connection with be operated from a single central position The the relevant equipment following section provides an introduction to Controls B 1 Control Display Operate the controller only when traffic 2 MENU button and road conditions allow this to avoid Opening start menu endangering the car s occupants and other i i 3 Controller road users by being distracted The controller can
23. 3 Selecting a menu item refer to 1 gt Confirm by changing the field v oO v i V W U x 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG iDrive Status information Entertainment 103 5 mi rl z i PM 1 Display for gt Entertainment Radio CD or gt Telephone in Communication Name of the connected mobile phone network search or no network gt BMW Assist Active voice connection with a BMW Assist service 2 Entertainment audio output off 3 Display for traffic information eh Traffic information for the navigation sys tem can be received and transmission is switched on 4 Display for gt HNewentries present in Missed calls gt Roaming active 5 i lt is possible to make calls if the mobile phone is paired with the vehicle atl Reception strength of mobile phone network display depending on mobile phone 6 Time Other displays Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice command system 20 Closing opening the screen FN Do not place objects in the vicinity of the open screen otherwise the screen may be damaged 4 Closing the screen 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Close display and press the con troller Close display Info sources JA Audio a Display settings IBY ve Steering wheel buttons
24. 63 93 Lighting lamps and bulbs 223 of instruments 95 of vehicle refer to Lamps 92 Light switch 92 Limit refer to Speed limit 79 Limit refer to Speed limit 79 Load securing equipment refer to Securing cargo 118 Lock buttons of doors refer to Locking 33 Locking adjusting confirmation signal 31 from inside 33 from outside 30 without remote control refer to Convenient access 36 Locking and unlocking doors from inside 32 from outside 29 Low beam headlamps 92 automatic 92 replacing bulbs 224 Lower back support refer to Lumbar support 47 Luggage compartment refer to Cargo bay 251 Y Y V V x Everything from A Z Luggage compartment lid 33 convenient access 37 emergency release 34 opening from outside 33 unlocking manually 33 unlocking with remote control 30 Luggage rack refer to Roof mounted luggage rack 118 Lumbar support 47 M M S tires refer to Winter tires 211 Maintenance refer to BMW Maintenance System 217 Service booklet Maintenance system 21 7 Malfunction warnings refer to Check Control 77 Manual BMW Teleservice Call 193 Manual car wash 220 Manual on the radio 155 Manual operation door lock 32 fuel filler door 202 glass roof 40 luggage compartment lid 33 transmission lock automatic transmission 62 Manual operation with automatic tra
25. Munchen you can also enter the English spelling Munich or the Italian spelling Monaco O gt Z gt When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identifica tion gt The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored on the navigation DVD Thus entry of errone ous or unregistered names is impossible 135 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG iDrive for operating principle refer to page If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Navigation is selected and press the controller Select the destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new destination refer to page 4 N Navigation gt New destination MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WY Route preference gt Arrow display t Select Start guidance and press the con troller Add tocaddress book information on destination Delete entry Delete list il ae f AT I l IN i E la After the route has been calculated destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis play on the Control Display Destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map display Select the s symbol and press the controller During destination guidance you can operate other equipment items a
26. Opening manually The integrated key of the remote control refer to page 28 fits the luggage compartment lid lock gt If you open the luggage compartment lid using the key while the alarm system is armed the alarm will be triggered Switching off an alarm refer to page 35 4 33 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing Turn the key all the way to the left the luggage compartment lid opens Locking or unlocking separately The switch is located in the glove compartment 1 Locking the luggage compartment lid 2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid Locking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1 The luggage compartment lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system If you give the remote control without the inte grated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked the luggage compart ment lid cannot be opened This is an advan tage when using valet parking for example Locking the glove compartment refer to page 106 Unlocking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2 34 Emergency release Pull the lever in the cargo bay The luggage compartment lid is unlocked Closing The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear other wise injuries may resu
27. To display the combined map arrow view 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller 4 Turnthe controller until Language Units is selected and press the controller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG until Languages is selected and press the controller 6 Select Display arrow view and press the controller i m Languages Text language English O Navigation voice instructions mis CRE ati Switching voice instructions on off Starting stopping destination guidance Map guided destination selection mh ON Displaying the menu in which the informa tion last selected can be shown hidden refer to Selecting destination using infor mation page 129 5 Changing map display gt An Map facing north gt Y Map direction of travel 6 Changing route criteria 7 Calling up traffic information manually 8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies The projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the bottom line of the Control Display To exit from the menu Select the 44 arrow and press the controller At scales of less than 250 miles 500 km you can have the map shown facing north or in the cur rent direction of travel
28. and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underin flation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the sys tem detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Active steering The concept Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel move ments It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving When you are driving in the low road speed range e g in a town or when parking the steer ing angle increases i e the steering becomes 88 very direct and less effort is required to
29. approx 155 miles 250 km gt With a medium load 2 persons cargo bay full or 4 persons without luggage approx 95 miles 150 km gt With a full load 4 persons cargo bay full approx 30 miles 50 km Drive cautiously and do not exceed a EN speed of 50 mph 80 km h In the event of pressure loss vehicle handling changes This includes reduced tracking stability in braking extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a suitable location Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose resulting in an accident Do not continue driving Instead contact your BMW center lt 4 Malfunction 1 The small warning lamp flashes in Fr l yellow and then lights up continu 1 ously the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow On the Control Display the wheels are shown in gray and a message appears No punctures can be detected This type of message is shown in the following situations gt If there is a malfunction Have the system checked gt Ifawheel without TPM electronics has been mounted gt If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency Message for unsuccessful system reset PL y The warning lamp lights up yellow A j 1 message appears on
30. delay 4 Engine oil level OK 5 The oil level sensoris defective a OE Do not add engine oil You can continue l your journey Note the newly calculated dis mn tance remaining to the next oil service refer to page 217 Have the system checked as soon as possible 6 If necessary move the highlight marker to the second field from the top Turn the con troller until Engine oil level is selected and iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 press the controller Display via iDrive The oil level is displayed To exit the display immediately Select 4 and press the controller 214 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Possible messages gt Engine oil level O K gt No measurement available Updating engine oil level measurement The engine oil level is measured This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a stand still on a level surface and the engine is run ning and about 5 minutes while the car is on the move gt Oillevel at the minimum Refill with 1 quart of engine oil Add 1 US quart 1 liter of engine oil at the next opportunity but no more than that refer also to Adding engine oil below gt Engine oil level too high A Too much oil will harm the engine Have the vehicle checked without delay gt Please observe recalculated service inter val for engine oil Do not add engine oil You can continue your journey Note the newly calcula
31. for which you can continue driving on the basis of the following guidelines gt With a light load 1 to 2 persons without luggage approx 155 miles 250 km gt With a medium load 2 persons cargo bay full or 4 persons without luggage approx 90 miles 150 km gt With a full load 4 persons cargo bay full approx 30 miles 50 km Drive cautiously and do not exceed a EN speed of 50 mph 80 km h otherwise there is a risk of an accident In the event of pressure loss vehicle handling changes This includes reduced tracking stability in braking extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a suitable location Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose resulting in an accident Do not continue driving Instead contact your BMW center lt 4 Malfunction 1 The warning lamps come on in yel FIN low message appears on the Con 1 trol Display The Flat Tire Monitor has a malfunction or has failed Have the system checked as soon as possible Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four mounted tires The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of
32. i ALUX i AUX IN External audio source Playback begins with the first track You can store the USB function on the pro grammable memory keys to start audio play back refer to page You can call up the tracks using the playlists Make your selection e g Playlists or Art ists and press the controller an LI W b 4 USR Artists Genres 001 Track 1 002 Track 2 03 Track 3 004 Track 4 Select a track and press the controller Any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed e g the name of the artist Press the controller during playback Select Details and press the controller 4 Alix 4 SR Tone A ylists Genres Repeat track Random 004 Track 4 The information is shown for the current track and information With USB devices you can also call up tracks using the file directory The tracks can be displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet 171 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG USB audio interface Repeating tracks 1 Select the current track and press the con troller 2 Select Repeat track and press the con troller i z ALUN 4 USR P ylists Genres 004 Track 4 Stop repeating 1 Press the controller 2 Select Repeat track and press the con troller Random play sequence You can play the tracks in the selected list in random order e g all tracks of a si
33. respondingly trained personnel Otherwise if such work is carried out improperly the high voltage in the system presents the danger of fatal injuries lt 4 223 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Replacing components Removing the headlamp cover 1 Pullthe wire brackets over the notches see arrows and fold to the side 2 Fold away the headlamp cover Be careful when attaching the headlamp EN cover and ensure that both wire brackets are securely in place otherwise leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp sys tem Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order Halogen headlamps Halogen low beams and high beams H7 bulb 55 watts Always wear gloves and eye protection the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is pressurized Otherwise there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged 4 The figure shows the right hand headlamp 1 High beams 2 Low beam headlamps 1 Remove the headlamp cover 2 Fold down the holding bracket 3 Remove and replace the bulb 224 4 Reattach the bulb holder with the notch at the top 5 Fold the holding bracket back up and let it snap into place 6 Attach the headlamp cover Parking lamps roadside parking lamps W5W bulb 5 watts 1 Remove the headlamp cover s nt s 72 The figure shows the right hand headlamp 2 Pull out the bulb holder 3 Remove and replace the bulb 4 Reinsert the bulb holder
34. 124 3 Press the controller A Address book 5 Opening address book iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Pirin Car Data Address boc gt jp New destination ime SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA Route preference Arrow display Select Address book and press the controller Storing destinations in address book You can store approx 100 destinations in the address book 131 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Select Address book and press the con ation refer to Entering a destination manu troller ally page 1 Select New address and press the con Select Store in address book and press troller the controller You can also enter your current position into the r address book if you have left the area covered D 1 P RST W Z by the navigation DVD In this case you must TUE enter aname i aP Address book Home address Name ADAM DR TOM troller Select Address book and press the con The stored entries appear on the Control Select Enter address and press the con i Display troller Enter the name and address refer also to i gP Address book JAD 1 OP RST W 2 Entering a destination manually page Select Store in address book and press the controller sors The entry is stored in the address book DR TOM You can also store a destination from the desti JULIA nation list in the a
35. 222 headlamps 220 high pressure washer 219 interior 221 leather 221 light alloy wheels 221 paintwork 220 plastic parts 222 rubber seals 221 safety belts 222 sensors and cameras 222 upholstery and cloth trim 221 washing the car manually 220 windows 220 wiper blades 220 Cargo securing 118 Cargo bay capacity 239 convenient access 37 enlarging refer to Through loading system 108 lamp refer to Interior lamps 95 lid refer to Luggage compartment lid 33 opening from outside 33 246 Cargo bay lid refer to Luggage compartment lid 33 Cargo bay net refer to Securing cargo 118 Cargo loading securing cargo 118 stowing cargo 117 vehicle 117 Car jack jacking points 227 Car key refer to Integrated key remote control 28 Car phone 176 installation location refer to Center armrest 107 refer to Mobile phone 176 refer to separate Owner s Manual Car radio refer to Radio 154 Car shampoo 222 Car wash 116 Catalytic converter refer to Hot exhaust system 115 Categories for satellite radio 161 CD 150 163 CD changer 163 compressed audio files 163 controls 150 fast forward reverse 167 installation location 167 playing a track 165 random order 166 repeating a track 166 selecting a CD 163 selecting a track 164 switching on off 150
36. A Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver s view Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks other wise they could endanger the car s occupants e g in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv ing lt 4 Cup holders Use lightweight and shatterproof contain ers and do not transport hot beverages otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident Do not force contain ers that are too large into the cup holders oth erwise damage could result 4 LL e tea mur e O There is one cup holder in the center console You can mount an attachable cup holder on the side of the center console Ashtray Opening p Push the ridge on the cover 107 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter Emptying Lift out the insert Lighter Cu With the engine running or the ignition switched on press in the cigarette lighter The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out A Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by 3 the knob only Holding or touching it in other areas could result in burns When leaving the car always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves 4 Connecting electrical appliances In your BMW when the engine Is running or the ignition is switched on you can use electrical devices such as a hand lamp
37. At scales of 250 miles Turn the controller to adjust the scale 500 km or greater the map is always north ori ented Changing the map display AV SN Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller The next map display is displayed Changing the scale Displaying towns cities and streets along the route You can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance The distances remaining to be traveled within each section of the route are also displayed 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top Turn the controller until Route list is selected and press the con troller c e _ gt Z 1N Navigation New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA Route preference re Arrow display To exit from the menu Select the 4 arrow and press the controller 139 J Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 0 2 mis SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET db D Voice instructions can be switched on or off during the destination guidance in the arrow or map display Select the mj symbol and press the controller To switch the voice instructions on off at any time Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press t
38. Distance traveled mon Speed Consumption mpy Departure time Driving time Distance traveled Average speed VV VV V Average fuel consumption Switching trip computer on off and resetting all values to zero 1 Select Set and press the controller 2 Select the desired menu item and press the controller 70 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Settings and information Operating principle 1 Button for gt Selecting display gt Setting values 2 Button for gt Confirming selected display or set val ues gt Calling up computer information 68 3 When the lights are on instrument lighting brightness 95 4 Calling up Check Control 77 Units of measure You can set units of measure Adjusting the units of measure iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller O NOA Checking oil level 213 Setting the time 75 Setting the date 76 Viewing service requirement display 72 Exiting displays The outside temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx 15 seconds If required complete the current setting first Select Language Units and press the controller If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller 71
39. Hills Los Angeles CA 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to gt To enter spaces the third field from the top Turn the control Select the _ symbol and press the con ler until the city or town name is selected troller 7 he li h ller eas from the list and press the controlle gt To delete individual numbers or letters Move the controller towards the right to select and press the controller gt To delete all numbers or letters BEVERLY BEACH Move the controller toward the right to BEVERLY HILLS CALIFORNIA select qm and press the controller for BEVERLY HILLS MICHIGAN a longer period BEVERLY HILLS MISSOURI 3 Select the zip code and press the controller BEVERLY HILLS TEXAS The corresponding destination is displayed 4 Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the con troller O 2 2 gt Z Entering street house number and intersection After the street you can also enter the intersec tion or the house number 125 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Street or the street displayed and press the controller Enter the street The street is entered in the same manner as the town or city SO BCLUR STV W Z ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA PL ALDBURY CT ALDEN DR The intersection is entered in the same way as the street You can also enter a street witho
40. Ibs Otherwise overloading can result in damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions lt 4 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the YYY amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib pas sengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1 400 Ibs minus 750 Ibs 650 lbs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle Load Max Load lt Max Load RiR 6 z Max Load The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo luggage The greater the weight of the occupants the less cargo lug gage can be transported Stowing cargo Coupe 117 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG N Q D gt m Things to remember when driving Conver
41. Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote control 103 Interesting destination for navigation 129 Interim time 79 Interior lamps 95 remote control 30 Interior motion sensor 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Interior rearview mirror 52 automatic dimming feature 53 compass 105 Interlock 61 Intermittent mode of the wipers 63 J Jacking points 227 Jets refer to Air vents 97 Joystick refer to iDrive 16 Jumpering refer to Jump starting 230 Jump starting 230 K Key refer to Integrated key remote control 28 Keyless go refer to Convenient access 36 Keyless opening and closing refer to Convenient access 36 Key Memory refer to Personal Profile 28 Kick down 61 Knock control 202 L Lamps Adaptive Head Light 94 instrument lighting 95 interior lighting 95 Lamps refer to Parking lamps low beams 92 Lamps and bulbs replacing bulbs 223 Language Units 71 80 Language Units in navigation 138 140 Languages 80 Languages in navigation 138 140 Lashing eyes refer to Securing cargo 118 Last destinations refer to Destination list 130 Last seat pos 50 LATCH child restraint fixing system 56 Leather care 221 LED Light emitting diodes 223 Length refer to Dimensions 237 License plate lamp replacing bulb 226 Light alloy wheels 221 Light emitting diodes LED 223 Lighter 108 socket 108 Lighting
42. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top Turn the controller until Arrow display is selected and press the controller NM Navigation New destination SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY W Route preference Current position li 0 2 mis SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET qi Switching voice instructions on off Starting stopping destination guidance Arrow to destination as the crow flies Route criterion Distance to the next change of direction Current location NO oO BB WN Direction of travel gt Outline of an arrow Destination guidance on the calculated route gt Solid arrow Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal culated route whenever the vehicle is not in an area recorded on the navigation DVD e g in a parking garage Depending on your vehicle s equipment the projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display The arrows change appearance before a change of direction 137 E Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG c e _ gt ion guidance Destinat SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET ot 1 Street name for change of direction 2 Distance to change of direction 3 Change of direction To exit from the menu Select the 42 arrow and press the controller Map display You can have your current position displayed on a map Af
43. Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG LL e tea mur e O Everything under control until Units is selected and press the con troller Lanquages Consumption mpg Distance Pressure Temperature 6 Select the desired menu item and press the controller 7 Select the desired measurement unit and press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Service requirements m 10000 12 2006 The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition gt The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by your BMW Service Advisor 4 For certain maintenance operations you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster 72 F SERVICE INFO Switch on the ignition refer to page 58 Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the words SERVICE INFO Press button 2 Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Possible displays a fF N Button for selecting functions Service requirements Engine oil Roadworthiness test Front brake pads Supplementary information You
44. Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction for instance if it has become too hot in the car Draft free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Microfilter activated charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air The activated charcoal filter pro vides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air Your BMW cen ter replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance Parked car ventilation The concept The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature if necessary The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive refer to page 16 Two different switch on times can be preselected The parked car ventilation remains switched on for 30 minutes The system can also be switched on and off directly Due to its high power consumption it should not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge The parked car ventilation system comes on if the outside temperature is above 59 F 15 C when the switch on time was preselected but is ready for use at any temperature when the system is switched on directly The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel The a
45. Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured Releasing the button interrupts the closing process 4 Switching on interior lamps While the car is locked Press the Lock button You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc Unlocking the luggage compartment lid Press the EJ button for a longer period The luggage compartment lid opens a short distance regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt The luggage compartment lid swings backward and up when opened Ensure that there is sufficient clearance To avoid locking yourself out by accident do not place the remote control in the cargo bay A previously locked luggage compartment lid is locked again after closing Before and after each trip check that the lug gage compartment lid has not been inadvert ently unlocked 4 Confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Open the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller ee i Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller 6 Select Confirmation and press the con troller Won Door locks
46. a flat tire the system must be reset while all tire infla tion pressures are correct Always use wheels with TPM electronics Oth erwise the system may malfunction gt Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed reset the system 4 System limitations TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud den severe tire damage caused by out side influences 4 The system does not work correctly if it has not been reset for example a flat tire may be indi cated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire if a wheel without TPM electronics such as a compact spare wheel has been mounted or if TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio fre quency 85 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG v i O Technology for driving comfort and safety Status indicator on the Control Display The color of the wheels represents the status of the tires and the system TPM takes into account that tire pressures change while the vehicle is being driven The tire pressures do not need to be corrected unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means of color indicators Green The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the established target value TPM active appears on the Control Display One wheel yellow There is a flat tire or s
47. air distribution can be switched on and off manually The air is directed to the windshield to _ the upper body area and to the footwell Automatic air distribution adjustment is deactivated You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO button This automatically switches on the cooling function as well Fine adjustments to manual air distribution You can set the rate of incoming airflow for manual air distribution iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller to the left to open Cli mate 3 Select Vent settings and press the con troller Automatic progr e 98 4 Select the desired field Vent settings 5 Turnthe controller to set the air distribution Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows 2 Airto the upper body area 3 Airto the footwell Temperature Set the desired temperatures indi vidually for the driver s and front passenger s sides The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possi ble regardless of the season using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary and then maintains it Dl When you switch between different tem perature settings in quick succession the automatic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature 4 You can achieve maximum heating power with the hi
48. away from the device Otherwise surfaces or electrical components may be corroded or damaged 4 CD DVD drives FN Do not use a cleaning CD as it may dam age parts of the drive 4 Vehicle storage If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for longer than three months your BMW center or a workshop that operates according to BMW specifications will be glad to advise you 222 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Replacing components Onboard tool kit The onboard tool kit is stored below the floor mat in the cargo bay Wiper blades Fold out the wiper arm and hold it 2 Press together the locking spring arrows 1 and fold out the wiper blade arrow 2 3 Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech anism pulling the blade toward the front To avoid damage make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the engine compartment lt 4 Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety They should therefore be handled carefully BMW recommends hav ing your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here gt Never touch the glass of new bulbs with 1 your bare fingers as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb s surface and reduce its service life Use a clean tissue cloth or something similar or hold the bulb by its base 4 You can obt
49. be used to select menu items and to adjust settings gt Move in four directions arrow 4 gt Turn arrow 5 gt Push arrow 6 16 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Menu overview Communication gt Telephone gt BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices Navigation gt Navigation system gt Onboard information e g for displaying the average fuel consumption Entertainment gt Radio gt CD player and CD changer gt AUX In port USB audio interface for external audio device Climate gt Vent settings gt Automatic programs gt Parked car operation menu Closing the screen Tone and display settings Traffic information settings T 7 y y m Settings for your vehicle e g for the central locking system V Display of service requirements and dates for statutory inspections gt Settings for telephone Operating principle As of radio readiness the following message appears on the Control Display Warning Use this system only when traffic conditions permit Safe vehicle operation is the driver s responsibility For further details see owner s manual To hide the message Press the controller The start menu is displayed The message is automatically hidden after approx 10 seconds Start menu Communication AR Climate Navigation we Entertainment All iDrive functions can be called up via five menu items Opening start menu Press the ME
50. can call up additional information on the maintenance regimen on the Control Display iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the menu Select Info sources and press the control ler Select Service Info and press the control ler If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller an Eri MEAN E a A if is 7 5 6 Rear brake pads 7 Brake fluid The sequence of displayed service items may vary The data for the next service appointment is shown first until Service requirements is selected and press the controller Check Conie i gt 4 Status 102009 M Rear brake pads WB Vehicle check IB Brake fluid kama BB State inspection BE Front brake pads 6 Select Status and press the controller 13 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG LL e L mur e O A list of selected maintenance operations and if applicable inspections required by law is dis played i at Service requirements 7 Sta tus ace Front brake Bad iO Se OR Brake fluid 91 State inspection 100 mis 6 Vehicle check You can request more detailed information on every entry el 100 mis Rear brake pads Service overdue Please make an appointment with your BMW center soon Select the entry and press the c
51. car the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the set tings stored for it are called up and imple mented This means that your personal settings will be activated for you even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings The individual settings are stored for a maxi mum of four remote controls They are stored for two remote controls if convenient access is In use Personal Profile settings For more information on specific settings refer to the specified pages gt Assignment of programmable memory keys refer to page 21 gt Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked refer to page 29 gt Automatic locking of the vehicle refer to page 32 gt Automatic call up of the driver s seat posi tion after unlocking refer to page 49 gt Programming buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 53 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt Triple turn signal activation refer to page 63 gt Settings for the display on the Control Dis play and in the instrument cluster gt 12h 24h format of the clock refer to page 76 gt Date format refer to page 77 gt Brightness of Control Display refer to page 80 gt Language of Control Display refer to page 80 gt Units of measure for fuel consumption distance covered remaining distances and temperature refer to page 71
52. car vacuum cleaner etc up to approx 200 watts at 12 volts as long as one of the following sockets is available Avoid damaging the socket by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size 108 Cigarette lighter socket To access the socket Open the ashtray at the front and pull out the lighter to use the socket In the cargo bay To access the socket Fold open the cover In the center console To access the socket refer to AUX In port on page 169 Coupe through loading system Opening 1 Torelease the rear seat backrest pull the corresponding lever in the cargo bay 2 The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for ward slightly Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint Closing Return the rear seat backrest to its upright posi tion and engage it Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG When returning the backrest into its seat EN Ing position make sure that the seat s locking mechanism is properly engaged Other wise cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants 4 The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo bay nets or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage refer to page 117 Convertible cargo loading Enlarging the cargo bay 1 p f pt a When the convertible top is closed you can enlarge the cargo bay To do so fold the cargo bay partition u
53. changing the sitting position transport the rele vant passenger on a rear seat Do not attach seat covers seat cushion padding ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below Other wise acorrect analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured 4 Status of front passenger airbags E a The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags shows the functional status of the front passenger s front and side airbags in accor dance with whether and how the front passen ger seat is occupied The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are acti vated or deactivated gt The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child restraint sys tem is detected as intended on the seat The front and side airbags for the front pas senger are not activated gt Most child seats are detected by the _ system especially child seats required by the NHTSA at the time of vehi cle production After mounting a child seat ensure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbag Is lit It indicates that the child seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated lt 90 gt The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat The front and side airb
54. control 3 Ifthe LED 2 flashes slowly after approx 20 seconds press the transmit key of the original hand held transmitter Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx 15 seconds alter the distance and repeat this step Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Digital compass 1 Adjustment button 2 Display The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving Operating principle You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed Press briefly switch display on off 3 to 6 seconds set the compass zone 6 to 9 seconds calibrate the compass 9 to 12 seconds set left hand right hand steering VV VV gt 12 to 15 seconds set the language Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle s geographic location so that the com pass can function correctly refer to the world map with compass zones To set the compass zone press the adjustment button for approx 3 4 seconds The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display To change the zone setting briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre spo
55. control all the way into the ignition lock gt Radio readiness is switched on Individual electrical consumers can operate Convenient access If the car is equipped with convenient access only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances refer to page 36 Removing the remote control from the ignition lock Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage Before removing the remote control push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism gt The ignition is switched off if it was on Automatic transmission You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position interlock 58 Start stop button CTI Pressing the start stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off gt The engine is started when you press the start stop button and depress the clutch if the car has manual transmission or the brake if the car has automatic transmission 4 Radio readiness Individual electrical consumers can operate The time and the outside temperature are dis played in the instrument cluster Radio readiness is switched off automatically gt When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock gt In cars with convenient access by touch ing the surface above the door lock refer to Locking on page 36 Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate The odometer a
56. control currently in use is outside of the vehicle gt The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx 2 seconds gt The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control cur rently in use Is inside the vehicle Comparison to the standard remote control In general there is no difference between using convenient access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above You should therefore first 36 familiarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 28 Special features regarding the use of conve nient access are described below gt If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows the glass roof or the convertible top the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle Please repeat the opening or closing procedure if nec essary 4 Unlocking Grasp the handle on the driver s or front pas senger s door completely arrow 1 This corre sponds to pressing the button Locking Touch the surface arrow 2 with your finger for approx 1 second This corresponds to pressing the Lock button gt To preserve the battery please make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle 4 Coupe convenient closure For convenient closure keep your finger on the surface arrow 2 Convertible window a
57. depending on acci dent severity by the safety belt tensioner and multi phase airbag retention system 4 Resetting If the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions This does not require tools 1 Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there y LAA LL F 2 Push the protection bar halfway down from above 3 Release the locking lever 4 Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place EA A 5 Repeat the procedure for the other protec tion bar Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is in the acti vated position Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling Work on the rollover protection system should only be performed by a BMW center Incorrectly performed work on the system may lead to system failure or incorrect operation To check the system and ensure flawless long term operation always observe the service intervals refer to page 72 4 91 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 4 ES O Lamps Lamps Parking lamps low beams 0 Lamps off daytime running lamps 1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps 2 Low beams welcome lamp
58. desired field 5 Press the controller to set the desired inten sity R The selected intensity level of the auto matic program is switched on Convertible program When the convertible top is down the Convert ible program becomes available for selection In the Convertible program the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the convert ible top down In addition the air flow rate is increased as vehicle speed increases When the Convertible program has been selected it is automatically activated every time the convertible top is opened gt The effectiveness of the Convertible pro gram can be enhanced considerably by installing the wind deflector 4 PAS air flow rate manually j Press the left side of the button to si reduce airflow Press the right side of the button to increase it You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power The display remains the same Switching the system on off With the blower at its lowest setting press the left side of the button to switch off the auto matic climate control All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on Press any button except REST or rear window defroster to reactivate the automatic climate control Automatic recirculated air control AUC Recirculated air mode S
59. detailed description of safety precautions and informa tion we request that you direct your particular attention to the following Only make entries when the traffic situa tion allows you to do so Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving use the hands free system instead If you do not observe this precaution your being dis 176 tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users 4 Suitable mobile phones Please ask your BMW center which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package and which mobile phones are compatible with the snap in adapter By virtue of their particular software versions these mobile phones sup port the functions described in this Owner s Manual Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones Care instructions Important information on this subject can be found in the separate mobile phone Owner s Manual Operating options You can operate the mobile phone using gt Buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 gt iDrive refer to page 181 gt Voice commands refer to page 187 gt Programmable memory keys refer to page 21 Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone s keypad oth erwise malfunctions may result Making phone calls with the BMW Assist system BMW Assist Calls You can use the BMW Assist System via the hands free unit for BMW Assist calls
60. down and engaged on both sides refer to page 109 otherwise it will not be possible to open the convertible top gt Ensure that the cargo does not press against the cargo bay partition from below v i O gt Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is closed Opening and closing Convertible top operation with convenient access refer also to page 30 As of radio readiness refer to page 58 Dl If possible conserve the battery by only operating the convertible top when the engine is running Before closing the convertible top remove all foreign objects from the windshield frame as these could prevent the hardtop from closing properly 4 3 N ses 1 Push button close convertible top 2 Push button open convertible top 3 LEDs gt The side windows move down slightly when the buttons for convertible top operation are pressed 4 Operation while driving You can open or close the convertible top while driving as long as the car is not moving faster than approx 25 mph 40 km h 41 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing If you accelerate to over 30 mph 50 km h while the convertible top is moving the procedure is interrupted A When operating the convertible top while d driving pay extra attention to the traffic to avoid an accident If possible do not move the convertible top while driving in reverse gear because your view to
61. environmentally friendly paper bleached without chlorine suitable for recycling Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index refer to page 244 Using this Owner s Manual 4 Notes 6 Reporting safety defects At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 23 Voice command system Controls 28 Opening and closing 45 Adjustments 55 Transporting children safely 58 Driving 67 Everything under control 81 Technology for driving comfort and safety 92 Lamps 97 Climate 103 Practical interior accessories Driving tips 114 Things to remember when driving Navigation 122 Starting the navigation system 123 Destination entry 136 Destination guidance 146 Whattodoif Entertainment 150 On off and settings 154 Radio 160 Satellite radio 163 CD player and CD changer 169 AUX In port 170 USB audio interface Communications 176 Telephoning 191 BMW Assist Mobility 202 Refueling 204 Wheels and tires 212 Under the hood 217 Maintenance 219 Care 223 Replacing components 229 Giving and receiving assistance Reference 236 Technical data 240 Short commands for the voice command system 244 Everything from A Z Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Notes Notes Using this Owner s Manual We have tried to make all the information in this Owner s Manual easy to find The fa
62. ignition is switched on A Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle only when the car is stationary to avoid endangering the car s occupants and other road users by being distracted lt Switch on ignition 1 Insert remote control all the way into the ignition lock 2 Switch on ignition without operating the brake or clutch or pressing the start stop button Preparation via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 3 Press the MENU button to call up the start menu Communication Pa Climate Entertainment 4 Press the controller to open the menu 5 Select Settings and press the controller Info sources Display op lt Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Communications MemtenRte Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Traffic Info settings BMW Service settings 177 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top select Phone and press the controller F Bluetooth Settings Help Pair new phone Phones previously paired N entries available Select Pair new phone and press the con troller o Bluetooth iPRone Phones previously paired No entries available Select Start pairing and press the control ler E Help Please use phones recommended by BMW for best performante www bmw com bluetoath
63. in 3 mm there is an increased risk of high speed hydroplaning even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 1 6 in 4 mm they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions In the interest of safety new tires should be installed p 4 F Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire s circumference the letters TWI for Tread Wear Indicator on the tire s sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators the tire has worn to a depth of 1 16 in 1 6 mm Wheel tire damage Please note that low profile tires cause wheels tires and suspension parts to be more suscep tible to road hazard and consequential dam ages Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect This can for exam ple be caused by driving over curbs The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior such as pulling severely to the right or left In these cases reduce speed immedi ately and have wheels and tires thor oughly checked To do so drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel If necessary have the vehicle towed there Otherwise tire damage can pose a lethal hazard to vehicle occupant
64. in the bumper measure the distance These sensors have a range of approx 6 5 ft 2 m However an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx 2 ft 60 cm from the corner sensors or approx 5 ft 1 50 m from the center sensors PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly as is usually the case when parking Avoid approaching an object at high speed oth erwise physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on the system is activated after approx 1 sec ond when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R Wait this short period before driving Switching off automatically After approx 55 yd 50 m of driving or above approx 20 mph 30 km h the system switches off and the LED goes out Signal tones When nearing an object its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone As the dis tance between vehicle and object decreases the intervals between the tones become shorter If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft 30 cm then a contin uous tone sounds An interval tone is interrupted after approx 3 seconds gt If you remain in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors gt Ifyou are driving parallel to a wall Malfunction Im fl The i
65. in the Owner s Manual we Say the specified commands word for word Indicates responses of the system Saying commands Activating the system 1 Briefly press the g button on the steering wheel A sound signal indicates that you can say commands 2 Say the command Ending canceling operation by voice commands Press the g button on the steering wheel or we Cancel In dialogs where text is spoken e g aname rather than a command canceling is only possi ble using the button on the steering wheel Having the possible commands read aloud The system recognizes specific commands that must be pronounced exactly word for word You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you wt Helpt Using alternative commands Often there is more than a single command to run a function e g we Dial namet or YNamec Digits from zero to nine are recognized You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input pur e O 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning Example dialing phone numbers Start the dialog Press the gf button on the steering wheel Command Dial number lt e g 123 456 7890 Voice control response Please say the number Depending on your equipment version 123 456 7890 Continue lt lt or 123 456 7890 And next lt
66. may fluctuate slightly Fuel display 135i in speedometer 68 Reserve Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the cruising range for the remaining amount of fuel is displayed on the computer Under a cruising range of approx 30 miles 50 km the message remains in the Control Dis play Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles 50 km otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur 4 Computer Displays in the instrument cluster Calling up information I F i i LP i 7 L 3 CA a Bi Press the button in the turn indicator lever The following items of information are dis played in the order listed gt Cruising range gt Average speed gt Average fuel consumption gt Current fuel consumption gt No information Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG To set the corresponding units of measure refer to Adjusting the units of measure on page 71 Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles 30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank It is important that you refuel as soon as d possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles 50 km otherwise engine func tions are not ensured and damage can occur 4 Average
67. month Press button 2 to confirm the entry Set the month and the year in the same way FM SY i Press button 2 The system stores the new date Via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller 4 Select Time Date and press the control ler 5 Select Date and press the controller Time 10 21 2008 MMDD Set date Date format 6 Select Set date and press the controller The first setting of the date display is now highlighted in this case the day 7 Turn the controller to make the adjustment Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 8 Press the controller to apply the setting The next setting is highlighted 9 Make the remaining adjustments After the last adjustment the date is stored Setting the date format 1 Select Date format and press the control ler 2 Select the desired format and press the controller Check Control The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys tems monitored Such a Check Control mes sage includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and in some circum stances a signal as well as text messages at the bottom of the Control Display Indicator and warning lamps
68. of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center if an Emergency Request has been sent Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi vidually agreed contract After your contract has expired the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you hav ing to visit a BMW center After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated no BMW Assist service will be available The BMW Assist sys tem can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed Requirements You can use BMW Assist when the following requirements are met gt The installed BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network This network must be capable of transmitting the ser vices gt To transmit position data the vehicle must be able to determine the current position gt To activate and update BMW Assist a GPS signal must be available gt You have subscribed to BMW Assist with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center Enabling must have been completed gt BMW Assist is activated refer to page 196 Offered services The following services are available via BMW Assist gt Emergency Request refer to page 229 When you press the SOS button a connec tion is established to the BMW Assist Response Center The BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you gt Automatic Collision Notification Under certain condi
69. on the CD player 1 Sound output for entertainment on off vol ume gt Press switch on off When you switch on the unit the last set radio station or track is played gt Turn adjust volume 2 Drive for audio CDs 3 SEM Eject CD za Station scan track search gt Change radio station gt Select track for CD player and CD changer 5 Drive for navigation DVD 150 Operation via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to call up Entertainment cD AUX Presets AM Set 1 103 5 SKI qi 0 97 5 f 7KROO 8 100 5 299 3 3 WNYC 4 943 You have the following choices gt FM and AM radio reception SAT satellite radio CD CD player or changer AUX AUX In port USB audio interface Set depending on the audio source other adjustments can be made e g with the radio update station with strongest reception store station tone control sam ple stations gt gt gt gt gt From another menu you can switch directly to the screen last displayed refer to Convenient call up of menu items on page 18 lt With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use Switching on off To switch the entertainment audio output on or off Press button 1 on the CD player mj This symbol
70. on the Control Display indi cates that sound output is switched off Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired volume is obtained You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond the setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Tone control You can alter various tone settings e g treble and bass or the speed dependent volume increase The tone settings are applied to all audio sources With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond the settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Changing tone settings 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller 4 Select Audio and press the controller VE Settings JA Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vi Vehicle Tires 3 Language Units V2 Time Date The tone settings can also be selected if you have called up Entertainment in the start menu Select Set and then Tone pressing the controller after each selection 1 Select Treble Bass and press the con troller Balance Fader 5pe b a Boss 2 Move the controller to the left or right to select Treble or Bass Treble 3 T
71. or street of destination you can enter the destina tion using a map You can use the cross hairs to select the destination on the map and then transfer it for destination guidance 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler New destination is selected 2 Press the controller SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WY Route nr fel ance Arrow disalau 3 Select Input map and press the controller ll Information UNITED STATES Town City Street House number Intersection 128 Oniine Edition for Part no 01 410014 954 02 08 BMW AG A section of a map is displayed on the Con 6 Select the desired menu item trol Display gt Start route guidance starts destination gt During destination guidance around the guidance current destination gt Show current position places your gt With the destination guidance deacti current position at the center of the map vated around the last destination gt Show destination position places the entered current destination at the center of the map gt Return to map changes back to the Input map gt 42 Exit the menu lm SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET 4 Select the destination with the cross hairs 4 SAS 0 UM Life gt To change the scale turn the controller wy LUN LIU ee gt Tomove the map move the controller in Return 19 map the desired direction The controller can be moved to th
72. phone ae Phones previously paired Ha ndy 2 Select Delete device and press the con troller EE E lu etoc th Phone Move device up Cell phone 1 Cell phone 2 The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are deleted as well Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning gt Selecting stored phone numbers e g from the list of accepted calls gt Ending a call When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off e g after taking the remote control out of the ignition switch you can continue an ongoing call via the hands free system for no more than 25 minutes Voice quality If the person you are talking to is having difficul ties understanding you this may be due to excessive background noise The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain extent To optimize voice quality during a call we recommend that you gt Reduce background noise e g by closing the windows reducing air flow from the automatic climate control or by pointing the open front air vents downward gt Reduce the volume of the hands free sys tem Requirements gt The mobile phone s pairing data are stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is oper ational gt The engine is running or the ignition is switched on gt The mobile phone is recognized by the
73. refer to Dynamic Brake Control 82 Brake fluid service requirements 72 Brake Force Display 88 Brake lamps Brake Force Display 88 replacing bulb 226 Brake pads breaking in 114 Brake rotors 116 brakes 114 breaking in 114 Brakes ABS 82 BMW Maintenance System 217 braking safely 116 breaking in 114 parking brake 59 service requirements 72 Brake system 114 BMW Maintenance System 217 breaking in 114 disc brakes 116 Breakdown services refer to Roadside Assistance 229 Breaking in the clutch 114 Break in period 114 Brightness 80 Bulb changing refer to Lamps and bulbs 223 Bulbs changing 223 Button for starting the engine 58 Buttons on the steering wheel 11 C California Proposition 65 warning 6 Call 184 195 Call accepting 182 displaying accepted 184 ending 183 missed 184 starting 183 245 Oo O O Gen 9 ad Everything from A Z Calling from phone book 183 from Top 8 list 184 redialing 184 Can holders refer to Cup holders 107 Capacities 239 Capacity of the cargo bay 239 Car battery refer to Vehicle battery 227 Car care refer to Care 219 Car Data 69 Care 219 automatic car washes 219 care products 219 carpets 221 CD DVD drives 222 chrome parts 221 convertible top 220 displays 222 exterior 219 fine wood parts
74. restraint When needed the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact The relevant side air bag supports the side upper body area The head air bag supports the head The airbags have been designed to not be trig gered in every collision situation e g not in minor accidents or rear end collisions Do not apply adhesive materials to the EN cover panels of the airbags cover them or modify them in any other way Do not attach seat covers cushions or other objects not spe cifically approved for seats with integral side air bags to the front seats Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the back rests Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle Do not mod ify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way This includes the uphol stered covers on the steering wheel instrument panel seats and roof posts as well as the sides of the roof lining Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered because there is a danger of burns In the event of malfunctions deactivation or triggering of the airbag restraint system have the testing repair removal and disposal of air bag generators executed only by aBMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the requ
75. risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off even with a child restraint system lt For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 89 Installing child restraint systems Observe the child restraint system man ufacturer s instructions when selecting installing and using child restraint systems Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin ished lt 4 Standard child restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap belt section of a lap and shoulder belt Incorrectly or improperly installed child restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat make sure that the front and side airbags for the front passen ger are deactivated otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy lt 4 v i O Backrest width The backrest width of the front passen ger s seat must be at its widest possible setting Do not change the setting after install ing the child seat Otherwise the child seat s stability on the front passenger s seat is lim ited lt 4 1 Adjust the backrest width to its widest set ting refer to page 47 2 Install the child seat Child seat security The rear safety belts and the front passeng
76. speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed With the trip computer refer to page 70 you can have the average speed for another trip dis played To reset average speed press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx 2 seconds Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running With the trip computer refer to page 70 you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed To reset average fuel consumption press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx 2 seconds Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini mum exhaust emissions Displays on the Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive for the operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller to the right to call up Navigation 3 Select Car Data and press the controller Navigation Onboard info 4 10 pm Arrival time Range Distance to dest Speed Consumption 330 mis 279 mis 38 5 mph 23 0 mpg 4 Select Onboard info and press the con troller D Car Data Trip computer Limit Arrival time Range Distance to dest Speed Consumption
77. switch again to stop the opening movement You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock refer to page 29 or 32 For information on closing with conve nient access refer to Locking on page 36 After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni tion is switched off you can still operate the roof 39 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG ir e tea mur e O Opening and closing for approx 1 minute as long as no door has been opened Pinch protection system If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur ing closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof or during closing from the raised position the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly Despite the pinch protection system EN check and clear the roof s travel path prior to closingit otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions such as very thin objects and the roof would con tinue closing 4 Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger press the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it there The roof closes without pinch protection Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power fai
78. the Control Dis _ play The system is not reset after a tire has been changed for example Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system refer to page 86 Declaration according to NHTSA FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla tion pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been 87 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG v i O Technology for driving comfort and safety equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys tem TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are signif icantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving ona significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s han dling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance
79. the diagram next to the filler neck 4 Ifthe coolant is low slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill 5 Turn the cap until there is an audible click Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible 216 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Maintenance BMW Maintenance System i an Service requirements Status The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte nance costs If and when you come to sell your BMW a com prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig nificant benefit Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take the differ ent driving conditions of your BMW into account Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements the system builds the basis for trouble free driving On the Control Display you can have the remaining times or distances for selected main tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed refer to page 72 gt Engine oil Brake pads separately for front and rear Brake fluid Vehicle check VV VV Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations Service data in the remote contro
80. there is an increased risk of an accident Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer With the ignition switched on press button 1 in the instrument cluster LL e tea mur e O When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time outside tem perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni tion lock Press button 1 in the instrument cluster Tachometer Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field see arrow In this range the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine 67 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control Coolant temperature A warning lamp will come on if the coolant and therefore the engine becomes too hot In addition a message will appear on the Con trol Display Check coolant level refer to page 216 Engine oil temperature When the engine is at normal operating temper ature the engine oil temperature is between approx 210 F 100 C and approx 300 F 150 C If the engine oil temperature is too high a mes sage appears on the Control Display Fuel gauge a TN F Ne D og ME Fuel tank capacity approx 14 US gallons 53 liters You can find information on refueling on page 202 If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period when you are driving in mountainous areas for example the indicator
81. turn the wheels In the higher speed range on the other hand the steering angle is reduced more and more This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range In critical situations the system can make tar geted corrections to the steering angle pro vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off refer to page 82 Malfunction The warning lamps come on Active lm steering is no longer operational At Cl _ low speeds greater steering wheel movements are required whereas at higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi tively to steering wheel movements The stabil ity enhancing feature may also be deactivated Drive cautiously and think well ahead Have the system checked Brake Force Display On the left normal braking On the right sharp braking Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Airbags The following airbags are located under the marked covers 1 Front airbags 2 Coupe head airbags 3 Side airbags in the seat backrests 4 Convertible knee airbags Protective action Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per sonal protection 4 The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro vide adequate
82. vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be tow started at all 1 Switch on the hazard warning flashers comply with local regulations 2 Switch on the ignition refer to page 58 3 Shift into 3rd gear 4 Have the vehicle tow started with the clutch depressed all the way and slowly release the clutch After the engine starts immedi ately depress the clutch completely again 5 Stop at a suitable location remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn ing flashers 6 Have the vehicle checked Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 e y 01 U09 sdi Bulag uorjeBiaen juowuie 1aju3 SUONeDIUNWWOD Ayjiqo w EE 233 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Technical data Technical data Engine data Displacement Number of cylinders Maximum power output at engine speed Maximum torque at engine speed 236 cu in cm hp rom Ib ft Nm rpm 128i 182 8 2 996 6 230 6 500 200 270 2 50 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG 1351 181 8 2 979 6 300 5 800 300 407 1 400 5 000 Dimensions Coupe 56 0 1 423 re 104 7 2 660 i 172 2 14 373 e All dimensions given in inches mm Smallest turning circle dia 35 ft 1 in 10 7 m 237 Online Edition
83. wear of the wiper blades and causing the rain sensor to malfunc tion 4 220 Convertible top care The appearance and life of the convertible top depend on proper care and operation Follow these instructions gt Do not fold the convertible top into the con vertible top box when the top is wet or fro zen as this may cause water spots mold stains or chafed areas gt If water spots occur on the inside headliner despite precautions remove them using a microfiber cloth and interior cleaner gt Ifthe vehicle is parked in enclosed areas for extended periods ensure that there is suffi cient ventilation gt Remove bird droppings immediately as their corrosive ingredients attack the con vertible top and damage the rubber seals To remove stains from the convertible top do not use stain removers paint thin ners solvents benzine or similar substances These substances may damage the rubber parts Improper care and cleaning may cause the convertible top and convertible top seams to become leaky lt To remove heavy soiling use a special convert ible top cleaner Follow the manufacturer s instructions for use After washing the convertible top three to five times treat it with an impregnating agent Paintwork care Regular care contributes to value retention and protects the paintwork against the long term effects of damaging substances Region specific environmental influences can damage the veh
84. while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display accompa nied by the word OIL 2 Press button 2 The oil level is checked and the reading dis played gt z O 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Under the hood Possible displays 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu ES r Communication we i i Climate nu Navigation Entertainment 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Info sources and press the control ler E Settings Display oh gt M Trafic Into 5 Ba Travel Info ST Service Info 1 Oillevel OK 2 Oil level is being checked This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move 4 Select Service and press the controller 3 Oil level down to minimum 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to Add engine oil as soon as possible but no the uppermost field Turn the controller more than 1 US quart 1 liter refer also to until Service requirements is selected and Adding engine oil on page 215 press the controller 4 Oil level is too high Too much oil will harm the engine Check Contr D lt gt Have the vehicle checked without Engine oil levels
85. 02 08 BMW AG Voice command system The concept The voice command system allows you to con trol operation of various vehicle systems with out removing your hands from the steering wheel Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands It is not neces sary to use the controller The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror refer to page 14 Precondition Via iDrive select the language in which the voice command system is operating so that the spoken commands can be identified Selecting the language for iDrive refer to page 80 Symbols in the Owner s Manual we Say the specified commands word for word t Indicates responses of the voice command system Saying commands Activating voice command system 1 Press the ES button on the steering wheel yy This symbol on the Control Display and a sig nal indicate that the voice command system is ready to receive spoken commands 2 Say the command Text or digits that are understood by the voice command system are displayed on the Control Display im Entertainment y This symbol appears on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands 23 Online Edition for Part no 01
86. 1 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0014954 02 08 BMWAG am a Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning Telephoning The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive the buttons on the steering wheel or via voice commands Once a mobile phone has been paired with your vehicle it is automatically recognized as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run ning or the ignition is switched on You can store the pairing data for up to four mobile phones simultaneously If several mobile phones are detected at the same time the mobile phone last paired can be operated via the vehicle Using the telephone inside the vehicle Using the snap in adapter The so called snap in adapter a holder for mobile phones allows you to charge the mobile phone s battery and connect the mobile phone to your vehicle s outside antenna This ensures better network reception and consistent repro duction quality Please contact your BMW center to find out for which mobile phones there are snap in adapters available For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways and can even save lives in an emer gency While you should consult your mobile phone s separate Owner s Manual for a
87. 10 gt z O Wheels and tires Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires Tire size e g 225 45 R17 91 V Nominal width in mm a Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating not on ZR tires Speed code letter in front of the R on ZR tires Speed code letter Q up to 100 mph or 160 km h T up to 118 mph or 190 km h H up to 131 mph or 210 km h V upto 150 mph or 240 km h W up to 167 mph or 270 km h Y up to 186 mph or 300 km h Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation DOT code e g DOT xxxx xxx 0708 Manufacturer s code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding DOT 0708 means that the tire was manufactured in week 7 of 2008 BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most even ifsome tires may last for 10 years 208 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA ABC Temperature ABC All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition t
88. 14 954 02 08 BMW AG 5 Press the i button on the steering wheel wt 6 Selecta track e g gt Track 11 The system says Track 1 lt Notes i For information on voice control of the telephone refer also to the separate Owner s Manual lt 4 For voice commands bear in mind the follow Ing gt Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume avoiding excessive emphases and pauses The same applies to spelling when entering a destina tion for navigation gt Always speak the commands in the lan guage of the voice command system gt When selecting a radio station use the standard pronunciation of the station name gt For entries in the voice activated phone book only use names in the language of the voice command system and no abbrevia tions gt Keep the doors windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise gt Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking 25 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG v O S D i lt Driving tips Navigation Communications Entertainment Mobility o oO v V W V x Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety comfort and con
89. 225 replacing bulb 226 Tank contents refer to Capacities 239 Technical changes 5 Technical data 236 Telematics refer to BMW TeleServices BMW Assist 191 Telephone installation location refer to Center armrest 107 Telephone refer to Mobile phone 176 Telephone refer to separate Owner s Manual Telephone list 54 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Temperature setting for automatic climate control 98 Temperature display outside temperature 67 outside temperature warning 67 setting the units 71 Tempomat refer to Cruise control 65 Text language refer to Language of Control Display 80 Theater for Tone control 152 Thigh support 46 Third brake lamp refer to Center brake lamp 226 Three point safety belt 51 Through loading system 108 Tilt alarm sensor 35 Tilt function passenger side mirror 52 Time Date 75 76 Time format 76 Timer refer to Preselecting switch on times 101 Tire inflation pressure 204 loss 85 86 Tire pressure monitoring refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85 resetting the system 86 system limitations 85 warning lamp 87 Tire puncture refer to Flat Tire Monitor 85 Tire Quality Grading 208 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Tires age 208 210 air loss 87 breaking in 114 changing refer to Changing wheels 226 condition 20
90. 33 Delete for mobile phone 185 Destination address deleting 133 entering 123 127 Destination for navigation destination list 130 entry 123 home address 133 manual entry 123 127 selecting from address book 132 selecting using information 129 selecting via language 127 selecting via map 128 storing 131 Destination guidance 136 canceling voice instructions 54 changing specified route 134 displaying route 137 distance and arrival 136 starting 136 terminating continuing 136 voice instructions 140 volume of voice instructions 140 Destination list for navigation system 130 Destinations recently driven to 130 Details for audio mode 171 Dial for mobile phone 183 Dial number 183 Differential breaking in 114 Digital clock 67 Digital compass 105 Digital radio refer to High Definition Radio 157 Digital Versatile Disc refer to Drive for navigation DVD 150 248 Dimensions 237 Directional indicators refer to Turn signals 62 Direction instructions refer to Voice instructions 140 Directory for navigation refer to Address book 131 Displacement refer to Engine data 236 Display 20 Display refer to Control Display 16 Display lighting refer to Instrument lighting 95 Displays refer to Instrument cluster 12 Displays and controls 10 Display settings 80 Disposal of coolant 216 remo
91. 4 Avoid highways in navigation 134 Avoiding unintentional alarms 35 Avoid tollroads in navigation 134 Axle loads refer to Weights 239 A Z 183 184 B Backrests refer to Seats 46 Backrest width adjustment 47 Back seats refer to Rear seats adjusting head restraints 48 Backup lamp replacing bulb 226 Bag for skis refer to Ski bag 109 Balance tone control 151 Band aids refer to First aid pouch 230 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Bar refer to Tow starting towing away 232 Bass tone control 151 Bass sounds refer to Treble and bass 151 Battery 227 charging 227 disposal 37 227 jump starting 230 temporary power failure 227 Battery renewal remote control for vehicle 37 Being towed 231 Belts refer to Safety belts 51 Belt tensioner refer to Safety belts 51 Beverage holders refer to Cup holders 107 Blower refer to Air flow rate 99 BMW car shampoo 222 BMW Assist 192 193 194 195 BMW Assist activating 196 concierge service 195 contacting BMW Customer Relations 194 Roadside Assistance 192 services offered 191 TeleServices 193 BMW Contact 186 BMW Contact Numbers 186 BMW Maintenance System 217 BMW Service settings 197 BMW Teleservice Call automatic 193 manual 193 BMW TeleServices 193 displaying 194 updating 194 Bottle holders refer to Cup holders 107 Brake assist
92. 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG i v O S D i lt Driving tips AENA ELOLA Communications Entertainment o oO v i V W U x Voice command system If no further commands are possible continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive Terminating or canceling voice command system Press the ES button on the steering wheel or pt Cancel Commands Having the possible commands read aloud You can have the system read aloud the possi ble commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display To have the possible commands read out to you wt Options For instance if you have selected CD the commands available for operating the CD player and CD changer are read out Opening help wt Help Using alternative commands There are often anumber of commands to runa function e g wt Radio ont or gt Turn radio ont Calling up functions immediately via short commands Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately irrespective of which menu item is selected refer to page 240 Opening the start menu p Main menut Example selecting a track 1 Ifnecessary switch on entertainment audio output 2 Press the ES button on the steering wheel nf 3 Entertainmentt The system says Entertainmentt Track 2 Entertainment CD The system says CDon lt lt ptl 4 24 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 0
93. 5 4 Press the controller Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria e g Pre sets If Autostore does not show a station in the AM waveband or if the displayed stations are no longer receivable update the stations with the best reception refer to page 155 154 anaes stations i F M All stations Turn the controller Buttons on the CD player ua Press the button for the corre de direction The system switches to the next displayed sta tion You can also change the station with the but tons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 Changing selection criteria In addition to the stations currently displayed you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed You can choose from the following selection criteria gt Allstations Stations that can currently be received on the FM waveband gt Autostore Stations with the best reception on the AM waveband For High Definition Radio stations with the best reception on the FM waveband gt Presets Stations you have previously stored refer to page 156 gt Manual To set stations that can be received in addi tion to those already being displayed refer to Selecting the frequency manually page 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG To change the selection criterion Move the highlight marker to the second field f
94. 5 Capacities Notes Fuel tank US gal liters approx 14 0 53 Fuel grade page 203 including reserve of US gal liters approx 2 1 8 0 Window washer system For more details page 64 including headlamp washers US qt liters approx 6 3 6 0 239 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG V oO Y U V x Short commands for the voice command system Short commands for the voice command system With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly regardless of which menu Communication Function To open phone 183 To dial phone number 183 To display phone book 183 To select from phone book 183 To display Top 8 183 Toredial 183 To display Received calls 183 To display Missed calls 183 To display Bluetooth 177 To open BMW Service services 192 Navigation Function To open navigation 129 To display current position 144 To open Enter address 123 To open New destination 123 To display Input map 128 To open Information 129 To display address book 131 To display destination list 130 To switch on destination guidance 136 To switch off destination guidance 136 To display route criteria 134 To switch on voice instructions 140 To switch off voice instructions 140 To repeat voice instructions 140 240 item is selected Here are the important short commands for the voice command system Command Phones Dial number A to Z Call or Dial n
95. 9 damage 209 inflation pressure 204 labels 208 minimum tread depth 209 new tires 210 pressure monitoring refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 pressure monitoring refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85 puncture 85 retreaded 210 Run Flat Tires 210 size 208 wear indicators refer to Minimum tread depth 209 winter tires 211 Tires FTM 84 TMC station refer to Traffic information 141 Tone 151 Tone in audio mode adjusting 151 middle setting 152 Tools refer to Onboard tool kit 223 Top 8 for mobile phone 184 Torque refer to Engine data 236 Touch tone dialing 186 Tow bar 232 Tow fitting 231 Tow fittings for tow starting and towing away 231 Towing 231 car with automatic transmission 231 methods 232 Towing and tow starting 231 Town city for destination 124 Town City in destination entry 124 Tow rope 232 Tow starting 231 TPM 86 TPM refer to Tire Pressure Monitor 85 Tracks random play sequence 166 sampling Scan 165 searching for 165 Traction control refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82 Traffic information for navigation calling up 142 display on route map 143 during destination guidance 144 switching on off 141 symbols 143 Traffic Info settings 142 Traffic jam displaying traffic Information 141 driving around 144 Transmission automatic transmiss
96. BMW center 4 Jack mounting points ae j The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration Vehicle battery Battery care The battery is 100 maintenance free the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli mate Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery Charging the battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off Connections refer to Jump starting on page 230 Disposal Fos Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or hand them in to a recy cling center Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport Power failure After a temporary power loss the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed gt Time and date These values must be updated refer to page 75 gt Radio In some cases stations may have to be stored again refer to page 156 gt Navigation system Wait for the system to start refer to page 146 gt Glass roof It may happen that the roof can only be raised The system must be initialized Please contact your BMW center gt Seat and mirror memory The positions must be stored again refer to pa
97. CDs DVDs to temperatures over 120 F 50 C high levels of humidity or direct sunlight CDs DVDs with copy protection CDs DVDs are often copy protected by the manufacturer This can mean that some CDs DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent Care Clean the reflective signal side of CDs DVDs as needed by wiping it with a commercially avail able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the center of the disc outwards Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG AUX In port You can connect an external audio device for instance an MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car s loudspeaker system You can adjust the tone using iDrive Connecting Connection for audio playback TRS connector 1 8 in 3 5 mm To play audio tracks over the car s loudspeaker system connect the headset or line out port of the external device to the AUX in port Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to call up Entertainment 3 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until AUX is selected and press the con troller iFM AM SAT OD AUX IN USE Set External audio source 4 Select AUX IN and press the controller 5 Adjust volume and tone if necessary Via programmable me
98. Confirmation All doors After door opened Unlock button Last seat pos O Relock door if not opened F7 Lock after driving 8 Press the controller TY The setting is selected The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Unlocking and opening doors gt Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or gt pull on the door handle of each door twice the first time unlocks the door the second time opens it Locking gt Use the central locking button to lock all of the doors simultaneously or gt press down the safety lock button of a door To prevent you from being locked out the open driver s door cannot be locked using the lock button Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside You should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside 4 Luggage compartment lid gt In order to avoid damage make sure there D is sufficient clearance before opening the luggage compartment lid lt Opening from inside a e L J e O Press the button the luggage compartment lid opens unless it has been locked Opening from outside Press the button see arrow or the EJ button on the remote control for a longer period The lug gage compartment lid opens slightly and can be swung upward
99. DC display on and press the con troller k The PDC screen is activated The display is shown on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated System limitations A Even with PDC final responsibility for estimating the distance between the vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver Even when sensors are pro vided there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected The system is also sub ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches thin or wedge shaped objects etc Low objects that have already been displayed e g curbs can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds Higher protruding objects e g ledges cannot be detected Loud sound sources out side or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal Therefore always drive cautiously oth erwise there is a risk of personal injury or prop erty damage lt 4 Driving stability control systems Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle s stability even in adverse driving conditions 82 Lighting Door loc B lt gt Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking Active safety is thus increased The ABS is operational every time you start the engine Braking safely r
100. Date Ma Traffic info settings i Bluetooth If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Enabled Assist services is selected and press the controller The currently available BMW Assist ser vices are displayed If necessary select Options and press the controller Ba Enabled Assist service Emergency call Traffic Info Concierge Roadside Assistance My Into Select Update services and press the controller BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser vices 196 Make sure that the vehicle can determine its current location Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky Leave vehicle ignition switched on during the activation process Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Communication we Climate Navigation Entertainment Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Into sources aq Audio JT Lisp lay settin 2 ee Steering wheel buttons Display ob a an i i Vehicle Tit es La ng l l ge Uni 4 Time Date Turn the controller until BMW Service set tings is selected and press the controller A Vehicle Tires a8 Language Units moe Time Date v Traffic Info settings Bluetooth If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller Onlin
101. G BMW Assist until Assist profile is selected and press the controller Enabled TeleServices felematics IO 198 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 ely 01 U04 sdi Bulang uorjeBiaeN IUOUMMEMISURR SUOEIIUNLULUOT 199 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Activating deactivating the Bluetooth link The use of Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries Observe all applicable local regulations Temporarily deac tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary If the Bluetooth link is deactivated you can no longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used in combination with the mobile phone e g a laptop lt 4 To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone 1 Press the MENU button to call up the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller Select Bluetooth and press the controller a vV Setti ngs i Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Traffic Info settings BMW Service settings 5 Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top select Settings and press the controller lt F Bluetooth Phone Help Er Bluetooth communication active 6 Select Bluetooth communication active and press
102. Guide the belt into its reel Fasten safety belts reminder for front seats The indicator lamps come on and an fs 1 acoustic signal sounds In addition a a message appears on the Control Dis play Check whether the safety belt has been fastened correctly The Fasten safety belts reminder is issued as long as the driver s safety belt has not been fas tened The Fasten safety belts reminder is also issued above approx 5 mph 8 km h if the front passenger s safety belt has not been fastened if there are objects on the front passenger s seat or if the driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts Damage to safety belts A If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident have the belt sys tem including any belt tensioners or child restraint systems replaced and the belt anchors checked Have this work done only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel Otherwise it is not guaranteed that the safety devices will func tion properly 4 Mirrors Exterior mirrors The front passenger s mirror is more con vex than the driver s mirror The objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror otherwise there is an increased risk of an acci dent 91 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 B
103. Have the vehicle serviced Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life BMW recommends having the vehicle serviced at a BMW center Also note the BMW service sys tem refer to page 217 General driving notes Close the luggage compartment lid Operate the vehicle only when the lug gage compartment lid is closed Other wise exhaust fumes could enter the interior of the vehicle 4 If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage compartment lid open 1 Close all windows and the glass roof 2 Greatly increase the air volume of the auto matic climate control system refer to page 99 Hot exhaust system In all vehicles extremely high tempera tures are generated in the exhaust sys tem Do not remove the heat shields installed in its vicinity and never apply undercoating to them When driving standing at idle and while parking take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay leaves grass etc Such contact could lead to a fire with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes Otherwise there is a risk of burns lt 4 Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads reduce road speed If you do not a wedge of water can form between tires and road sur face This situation known as hydroplaning means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road s
104. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac ing up 4 Press the cover on to close rine Take the old battery to a battery collec 4S tion point or to your BMW center lt 37 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing Windows To prevent injuries watch the windows while closing them Take the remote control out of the ignition when you leave the car otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possi bly injure themselves lt Coupe opening closing LE gt Press the switch to the resistance point The window opens as long as you press the switch a gt Press the switch beyond the resistance point The window opens automatically Press the switch again to stop the opening move ment You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch Convertible opening closing Window operation with convenient access refer also to page 30 To close the side windows while driving either close the rear windows first or all four windows together otherwise the windows may not close tightly at high speeds 4 38 Individually S gt Press the switch to the resistance point The window opens as long as you press the switch gt Press the switch beyond the resistance point The window opens automatically Press the switch again to stop the opening move ment You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch Th
105. LLS REXFORD DR y 8 Select a destination and press the control ler The scope of information and sym bols depends on the particular navi gation DVD you are using 4 9 Select the desired menu item gt To transfer the address to the destina tion list and start destination guidance Select the symbol and press the controller gt To establish a telephone connection Select the symbol and press the con troller gt To display additional destinations Select the 4 k symbol and press the controller gt To start a new search Select the symbol and press the con troller To exit from the menu Select the 4 arrow and press the controller Symbols in the map display If you select the hotel category for example and start a search hotels appear on the map as symbols To hide the symbols in the map display 1 Select the 1 symbol and press the control ler E 2 Select Hide map icons and press the con troller The symbols are hidden To show the symbols Select Show map icons and press the con troller To exit from the menu Select the 2 arrow and press the controller Destination list The last 20 destinations entered into the sys tem are shown in the destination list You can call up these destinations and transfer them for 130 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG destination guidance If you are planning a longer journey for exa
106. MW AG ir Oo fea mur e O Adjustments ERA 1 Adjustments 2 Ea 2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor 3 Folding mirrors in and out The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked Manual adjustment The mirrors can also be adjusted manually press the edge of the glass Folding mirrors in and out At driving speeds up to approx 12 mph 20 km h you can fold the mirrors in and out by pressing button 3 This can be beneficial in nar row streets for example or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx 25 mph 40 km h Automatic heating Depending on the outside temperature both exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the engine Is running or the ignition is switched on 52 Passenger side mirror tilt function automatic curb monitor Activating 1 Push the switch to the position for the driver s side mirror arrow 1 las Le gt Sy SY Ez 2 Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever to position R The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle e g a curb when backing into a parking space
107. NU button To open the start menu from the j menu Press the MENU button twice 17 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG v O S D i lt Driving tips Navigation Communications Entertainment Mobility o oO v i V W V x Q 2 Ses A Calling up menu items in the start menu As of radio readiness refer to page 58 Via the start menu you can call up the four menu items of Communication Navigation Entertain ment and Climate by moving the controller for wards backwards to the left or to the right You can call up the menu by pressing the con troller Convenient call up of menu items The convenient call up function enables you to gt Call up a menu item from the start menu in the view last displayed gt Switch directly between Communication Navigation Entertainment and Climate without having to press the MENU button To do so move the controller in the corre sponding direction and hold it for more than approx 2 seconds 18 Displays in menu i Menu item Menu tem amp gating Menu item 4 Menu item amp Menu ltem 7 1 Each menu is subdivided into fields The active field is highlighted 2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last selected ame Communication ras on w hy ifs T ww Navigation or onboard information E Entertainment F ua Le 00 Cl
108. ORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA 4 Select Roadside Assistance and press the controller SE BMW Assist 1 ja Service Request gt Start service Heading north REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA If the current location can be determined the current vehicle position is displayed 5 Select Start service and press the con troller The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto matically prior to the due date You can check when the BMW center was notified Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Info sources and press the control ler Settings Display ob Trafic Into Travel Into Service Info Select Service Info and press the control ler If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Service requirements is selected and press the controller Check Coil gt Auto Request Data exchange completed 10 21 08 4 10 pm Select Auto Request and press the con troller et Service requirements Service Request P 4 level Data exchange compl tea 10 7 1 08 04 10 pm You can transmit data regarding your vehicle s service status to your BMW center when you wish to arr
109. Oil level 213 Old batteries refer to Disposal 227 On a new destination in navigation 130 Onboard info 69 Onboard tool kit 223 On destination 130 On location 130 Opening and closing convenient access 36 from inside 32 from outside 29 using the door lock 32 via the remote control 29 Operation by voice for mobile phone 187 adjusting volume 188 canceling 187 correcting phone number 188 dialing phone number 188 placing a call 188 redialing 188 voice commands 187 voice phone book 188 Options 195 196 Orientation menu refer to Start menu 17 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Outlets refer to Ventilation 100 Output refer to Engine data 236 Outside temperature display 67 changing unit of measure 71 on computer 71 Outside temperature warning 67 Overriding selector lever lock 62 P Paintwork care 220 Park assistant refer to Park Distance Control 81 Park Distance Control PDC 81 Parked car operation 101 Parked car ventilation 101 Parked car ventilation 101 activating switch on time 102 preselecting switch on times 101 switching on and off directly 101 Parking vehicle 59 Parking aid refer to Park Distance Control PDC 81 Parking brake 59 indicator lamp 60 Parking lamps low beams 92 replacing bulbs 224 Parts and accessories refer to The individual ve
110. Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG When the status information BMW Assist or BMW Service is displayed in Communica tion only BMW Assist calls are possible It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con nection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress If this happens you must unpair the mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone Start up Pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle The following prerequisites must be met gt Compatible mobile phone the mobile phone is supported by the full preparation package mobile phone You can obtain information on the Internet at www bmw com gt The mobile phone is ready to operate gt The Bluetooth link is activated in the vehi cle refer to page 181 and in the mobile phone gt Depending on the mobile phone some default settings may be necessary for the mobile phone e g using the following menu items gt Bluetooth switched on gt Connection without confirmation gt Reconnection gt Depending on the mobile phone type the power saving mode setting for example may result in a paired mobile phone not being detected by the vehicle gt For pairing purposes define any number as the Bluetooth passkey e g 1 This Blue tooth passkey is no longer required after pairing has been successful gt The
111. Random Ti a a The current track on the CD is repeated Stop repeating 1 Press the controller again 2 Select Repeat and press the controller Compressed audio files 1 Select the current track and press the con troller 2 Select the desired menu item gt To repeat the selected track select Repeat track and press the controller gt To repeat all the tracks in the current directory select Repeat directory and press the controller Root Directary 4 sil Scan directory Random directory Stop repeating 1 Press the controller 2 Select Repeat track or Repeat directory and press the controller Random play sequence The tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order 1 Select Set and press the controller Other menu items are displayed 2 Select Random and press the controller Stop random function 1 Press the controller 2 Select Random and press the controller 166 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Compressed audio files 1 Select the current track and press the con troller 2 Select the desired menu item gt To play all the tracks in the current direc tory in random order select Random directory and press the controller gt To play all the tracks on the CD in ran dom order select Random all and press the controller Stop random function 1 Press the controller 2 Select
112. Random directory or Random all and press the controller Fast forward reverse Buttons on the CD player Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction The tracks can be heard but reproduction is distorted CD magazine The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo bay Removing the CD magazine To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine you must first remove it from the CD changer 1 Push the cover to one side arrow 1 2 Press the button arrow 2 The CD magazine is ejected Inserting removing CDs from the CD magazine When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal sensing area Inserting CDs Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on top oa par eb mur Lu Removing CDs Pull out the desired drawer see arrow and remove the CD 167 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG CD player and CD changer Inserting the CD magazine l Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc tion of arrow 1 and close the cover arrow 2 The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation Notes BMW CD DVD players and changers are EN officially designated Class 1 laser prod ucts Do not operate if the cover is damaged otherwise severe eye damage can result Do not use se
113. WES Vehicle Tires Ae Language Units A e time Date You can also close the screen manually 4 Opening the screen Press the controller Setting the conditions for opening the screen automatically You can select the events that cause the screen to open automatically 1 Open the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller A Select Display settings and press the controller 5 Select Display and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Brightness Open display at O Call O Check Control message O Navigation info O Speech input The various conditions are shown on the Control Display 6 Select the desired conditions and press the controller gt When there is an incoming call Call gt When an important Check Control mes sage is displayed Check Control message gt When there is a navigation system mes sage Navigation info gt When the voice command system is started Speech input gt When the ignition is switched on Ignition on gt When the Park Distance Control is dis played PDC Display on Z Display i Open display at D Check Control message O Navigation info O Speech input LE The condition is selected The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Programmable memory keys Using the programmable memory keys you can s
114. address in the address book This entry occupies the second Select Address book and press the con position in the address book troller Select the entry and press the controller Select Delete address and press the con Select Address book and press the con troller troller Move the highlight marker to the third field 4 Address book from the top Turn the controller until J P RAST LW 7 Home address is selected and press the controller Start guidance ee Edit address i gP Address book RER AIS A D J P RST W Z JULIA pa New address PETER Re ADAM DR TOM Open the start menu JULIA Press the controller to open the j menu Select Use current location as address or Select Settings and press the controller Save current destination during destina tion guidance and press the controller Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller Select Store in address book and press If necessary move the highlight marker to the controller the uppermost field Turn the controller 133 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Destination entry Using home address as destination 1 Select Home address and press the con troller 2 Select Start guidance and press the con troller Changing home address 1 Select Home address and press the con troller 2 Select Edit address and press the con troller For operation refer to Entering a destination m
115. age Units If necessary move the controller forward once to switch to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Time is selected and press the controller Date 03 53 PM 12 hour ie Hour memo 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control 7 Turn the controller until Set time is selected and press the controller i AB Time i 12 hour Time format D Hour memo Adjusting settings 8 Turnthe controller to set the hours and press the controller 9 Turnthe controller to set the minutes and press the controller The system accepts the new time Switching on the hour signal You will hear three tones just before each full hour Select Hour memo and press the controller Er The hour signal is activated Setting the 12h 24h format 1 Select Time format and press the control ler 2 Select the desired format and press the controller Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use refer also to Personal Profile on page 28 Setting the date In the instrument cluster To set the DD MM or MM DD date format refer to Setting the date format 76 SET 1 Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the date and the word SET Press button 2 Use button 1 to set the day of the
116. ags for the front pas senger are activated gt The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty The front and side airbags for the front pas senger are not activated Operational readiness of airbag system z EN p r As of radio readiness refer to page 58 the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational Airbag system malfunction gt Warning lamp does not light up at radio readiness or beyond gt Warning lamp remains permanently on In the event of a fault in the airbag system have it checked without delay otherwise there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci dent occurs 4 Convertible rollover protection system The rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident a crit ical driving situation an extreme tilt in the car s longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame the rollover protection sys tem ensures that the necessary headroom is maintained for all vehicle occupants Always keep the area of movement of the EN rollover protection system clear In minor accidents you are protected by the fastened safety belt and
117. ain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW center When working on electrical systems always begin by switching off the con sumer in question otherwise short circuits could result To avoid possible injury or equip ment damage when replacing bulbs observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufac turer 4 If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel lt Light emitting diodes LED Light emitting diodes installed behind translu cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle These light emitting diodes which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers are officially designated as Class 1 light emitting diodes Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours otherwise this could cause irritation to the retina 4 Xenon lamps These bulbs have avery long service life and are highly unlikely to fail If a xenon lamp fails never theless switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care provided that local legislation does not prohibit this Have any work on the xenon lamp system including bulb replacements performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor
118. ain the set speed if engine power output is insufficient Increasing speed Repeatedly press the lever arrow 1 until the desired speed is reached Each time the lever is pressed lightly the speed is increased by approx 1 mph 1 km h Accelerating using the lever Press the lever arrow 1 until the desired speed is reached The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal The system stores and maintains the speed v i O Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever arrow 2 until the desired speed is reached The functions are the same as when the set speed is increased or the vehicle is accelerated except that in this case the speed decreases Deactivating cruise control Tap the lever upwards or downwards arrow 3 In addition the system is automatically deacti vated gt When you brake the vehicle gt When you depress the clutch of a manual transmission or shift to neutral gt When you select the automatic transmis sion s neutral position N gt When the vehicle travels faster or slower than the set speed for an extended period e g when the accelerator is depressed gt When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC gt When DSC is intervening Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press the button arrow 4 The last stored speed is resumed and main tained The stored speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster The stored speed is cleared when th
119. ake certain settings for a per manent Bluetooth link e g using the authoriza tion or secure connection menu item refer to your mobile phone s operating instructions lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit ted to the vehicle This data transfer depends on your mobile phone and can take several min utes please refer to your mobile phone s oper ating instructions if necessary If not all phone book entries are displayed gt Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary gt Phone book entries with special characters may not be displayed Up to four mobile phones can be paired one after the other If a fifth mobile phone is paired the pairing data for the mobile phone whose pairing data was first stored on the vehicle is deleted gt Is the mobile phone supported by the mobile phone preparation package You can obtain information on the Internet at www bmw com gt Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and vehicle match The same Blue tooth passkey must be entered on the mobile phone s display and via iDrive gt Did it take you more than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey gt Only a limited number of devices can be connected with the mobile phone If neces sary delete connect
120. aking safely 116 Footwell lamps 95 For your own safety 5 Frequency selecting manually 155 Front airbags 89 Front seat setting 45 Frost removing from windows refer to Defrosting windows 100 FTM refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 Fuel 202 gauge 68 high quality brands 202 quality 202 specifications 202 tank contents refer to Capacities 239 Fuel clock refer to Fuel gauge 68 Fuel consumption display refer to Average fuel consumption 69 249 Y Y V V x Everything from A Z Fuel consumption statistics refer to Average fuel consumption 69 Fuel display refer to Fuel gauge 68 Fuel filler door 202 releasing in the event of electrical malfunction 202 Fuses 227 G Garage door opener refer to Integrated universal remote control 103 Gasoline refer to Required fuel 202 Gasoline display refer to Fuel gauge 68 Gear change with automatic transmission 61 with manual transmission 60 Gear display with automatic transmission 60 Gearshift lever automatic transmission with Steptronic 61 manual transmission 60 General driving notes 115 Glass roof electric 39 closing after electrical malfunction 40 convenient operation 32 opening closing 39 operation with convenient access 36 pinch protection system 40 raising 39 remote control 30 Glove compartment 106 GPS navigation refer to Navigation syste
121. alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time This pre vents unintentional alarms e g in the following situations gt In duplex garages gt During transport on car carrying trains boats ships or on a trailer gt When animals are to remain in the vehicle 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG v i O Opening and closing Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the Lock button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse quently locked again Convenient access Convenient access enables you to enter your vehicle without needing to hold the remote con trol in your hand All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body e g in your jacket pocket The vehicle detects the corre sponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passenger compartment Convenient access supports the following functions gt Unlocking locking the vehicle gt Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately gt Engine starting gt Convenient closure Functional requirement gt The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote
122. alue retention of your BMW BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your vehicle with products that are approved by BMW for this purpose Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on the products and services available for cleaning and caring for your BMW gt Original BMW CareProducts have been material tested laboratory checked and proven in the field and offer optimal care and protection for your vehicle lt FN Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents as these may result in dam age lt Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or hazardous to your health Therefore follow the warning and safety instructions on the packaging When cleaning inside the vehicle always open the doors or windows of the vehicle In enclosed areas pro vide for sufficient ventilation Only use products designed for cleaning vehicles 4 Exterior care Washing the vehicle Especially during the winter months EN ensure that the vehicle is washed more frequently Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle damage 4 After washing the vehicle apply the brakes briefly to dry them otherwise water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and brake discs can corrode lt 4 Automatic car washes Preference should be given to cloth car washes gt Do not use high pressure car washes LH otherwise water may drip into the vehicle around the windows 4 Before driving into a car wash en
123. ame gt Top amp Redialt Received calls Missed callst Bluetooth BMW Servicet Command Navigation Current position Enter address New destination Input map Info menus Address book or gt From address book Destination list Start guidances Stop guidance Route preference Navigation info on Navigation info off Repeat navigation info lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Function To show arrow display 137 Todisplaymap 138 Toopenroute 125 141 To open New route 141 Tochange scale 139 To display towns cities and streets along the route 139 Onboard info Function To open Car Data 69 To display computer 68 To display trip computer 70 To open speed limit 79 To open stopwatch 79 To activate road speed limit 79 To deactivate road speed limit 79 Entertainment Function Tone control 151 To switch onradio 154 To open FM 154 To open AM 154 To open All stations 154 To select radio station 154 To open Presets 154 To open Manual 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Command Arrow display Map Map facing northt Map direction of travel or Perspective Route menu New routet Scale miles or Scale feet Route list Command Car Datat Onboard info lt gt Trip computer Limit Stopwatch Limit on Limit off lt Command Audio lt Radio o
124. anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows in the gap between the seat and the backrest Coupe child restraint system with tether strap Use the top tether anchors to secure child restraint systems only otherwise the anchors could be damaged 4 tt For child restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors see arrows Coupe placement of the tether strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor Other wise the strap will not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG G NO 1 fh WN Direction of travel Head restraint Hook for upper retaining strap Anchor Rear window shelf Seat backrest Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys tem If necessary fold the head restraints upward before use 1 Push the head restraint upward 2 Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders 3 Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor 4 Push the head restraint into its lowermost position 5 Pull the retaining strap taut 97 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG LL e tea mur e O iving Dr Driving Ignition lock Insert the remote control into the ignition lock D i AN l F fi We Insert the remote
125. and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller a LE PDC Lighting Central locking Unlock button All doors Last seat pos After door opened O Relock door if not opened O Lock after driving 6 Select Central locking and press the con troller 7 Select Last seat pos and press the con troller Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG 8 Select After unlocking or After door opened CVIS Door locks Central locking Deactivated i y Il doors After un eactivated ia After door opened pened O Lock after driving 9 Press the controller Switching off automatic call up Select Deactivated and press the controller Safety belts Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per sonal protection 4 Before every drive make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device but they do not represent a substitute Closing Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop erly refer to page 45 Opening 1 Grasp the belt firmly 2 Press the red button in the buckle 3
126. ange a service appointment Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forwards to select Communication If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until BMW Assist is selected and press the controller Phone Service Request Start service REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA Select Service Request and press the controller BMW Assist i 3 Customer Relations P Start service REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA 193 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Start service and press the con The activated BMW TeleServices are dis troller played The service relevant data are transmitted Your Select Options and press the controller BMW center will contact you to arrange a ser Select Update services and press the vice appointment controller For all information related to your vehicle you Press the MENU button can call BMW Customer Relations This opens the start menu p Press the MENU button Press the controller to open the 1 menu This opens the start menu Select Settings and press the controller Move the controller forwards to select Communication Info sources Display ol lt If necessary move the highlight marker to v Audio the uppermost field Turn the controller JJO Display settings until BMW Assist is selected and press V Steering wheel buttons the controller vim
127. ansceiver equipment for instance CBs walkie talkies ham radio or sim ilar accessories may cause extensive damage 5 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Notes to the vehicle compromise its safety interfere with the vehicle s electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty See your BMW center for additional information 4 Mm Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and sys tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer tified automotive part lt California Proposition 65 warning California law requires us to issue the following warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of EN automobile components and parts including components found in the interior fur nishings in a vehicle contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Battery posts terminals and related accesso ries contain lead and lead compounds Wash your hands after handling Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water lt 4 6 Service and warranty
128. anually page 123 Route selection You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria You can change the route criteria as often as you like during des tination entry or during destination guidance The route is planned according to fixed rules The type of road is taken into account e g whether it is a highway or a winding road The road types are stored on the navigation DVD As a result the routes recommended by the navi gation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience Changing route criteria 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top Turn the controller until Route preference is selected and press the controller Navigation New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA Route list Arrow display 134 E The various criteria are shown on the Con trol Display 3 Select a route criterion for the route gt With highways Highways and major traffic arteries are given priority gt Avoid highways Highways are avoided as far as possible gt Fast route Fast route being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads gt Short route Short route irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be 4 Press the controller Avoid highways Fast route O Short route Dynamic rou
129. ars on the Control 2 Track Pispay Under some circumstances e g depend Ing on environmental or topographic con ditions it may not be possible to receive any signal The satellite radio cannot influence this Storing a channel 1 Select the desired channel 2 Press the controller A signal may not be available in tunnels or Other menu items are displayed underground garages next to high rise build 3 Select Store and press the controller ings in the vicinity of trees mountains or other strong sources of radio interference ni Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig FF nal becomes available again lt JOLE me CHANDI Channel A Details hannel B Lele hannel C Tone hannel D LES Mhannel E Presets is displayed 4 Turnthe controller to select a memory loca tion and press the controller E SAT Presets iv CH 007 Channel A CH 003 Channel C CH 004 Channel D CH 005 Channel E The channel is stored The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed again after a short time 162 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG CD player and CD changer Listening to CDs Compressed audio files CDs with compressed audio files MP3s can be played by the CD player and CD changer Starting the CD player The upper drive is for audio CDs Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up The CD is pulled in automatically Playback starts auto
130. art no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Climate a A O ON O Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows Air to the upper body area Draft free ventilation 100 Air to the footwell Air distribution manual Temperature adjustment left hand side of passenger compartment Maximum cooling AUTO program Air flow rate manual Display for temperature and air supply I 3 10 Automatic recirculated air control AUC Recirculated air mode 11 Temperature adjustment right hand side of passenger compartment 12 Residual heat 13 Windows defrosting and removing con densation 14 Switching cooling function on off manually 15 Rear window defroster 16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed The current setting for the air distribution is dis played on the Control Display g7 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG a e mur e O Climate Automatic climate control Comfortable interior climate The AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distri bution and air flow rate for almost all conditions All you need to do is select an interior tempera ture which is comfortable for you The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 28 Adjusting air distribution manually The
131. at this maneuver does not endanger other road users The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting EN reduced efficiency of the brake system drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to 116 high temperatures brake wear and possibly even brake failure lt You can increase the engine s braking effect by shifting down all the way to first gear if neces sary This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system Down shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans mission refer to page 61 A Never drive with the clutch held down with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off otherwise engine braking action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering Never allow floor mats carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals otherwise pedal function could be impaired 4 Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors while contaminants accumulate on the brake pa
132. at you should consult the rel evant section of this Owner s Manual for information on a particular part or assembly Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG The individual vehicle When you ordered your BMW you chose vari ous items of equipment This Owner s Manual describes the entire array of options and equip ment available with a specific BMW model Please bear in mind that the manual may con tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle Sections describing options and special equip ment are marked by asterisks to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi cle s equipment If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner s Manual please refer to the accom panying Supplementary Owner s Manuals Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced state of the art technology For this reason it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner s Manual could differ from those on your vehicle For your own safety Maintenance and repair Advanced technology e g the use of modern materials and powerful electron ICS requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods You should therefore have t
133. audio mode 166 Repeat for audio mode 166 Repeat track for audio mode 166 Replacement fuses refer to Fuses 227 Replacement remote control 28 Replacing bulbs refer to Lamps and bulbs 223 Replacing tires refer to New wheels and tires 210 Reporting safety defects 6 Reserve warning refer to Fuel gauge 68 Reservoir for washer systems 64 Reset 84 86 tone settings 153 Reset refer to Resetting tone settings 152 Reset for stopwatch 79 Residual heat 100 Restraint systems refer to Safety belts 51 Restraint systems for children 55 Retreaded tires 210 Reverse CD changer 167 CD player 167 Reverse gear automatic transmission with Steptronic 61 manual transmission 60 Road map 138 Roadside Assistance 192 Roadside Assistance 192 229 Roadside parking lamps 94 replacing bulbs 224 Roadworthiness test refer to Service requirements 72 Rollover protection system convertible 90 resetting 91 Roof load capacity 239 Roof mounted luggage rack 118 Rope refer to Tow starting towing away 232 Rotary pushbutton control refer to Controller 16 Route 134 arrow display 137 changing 141 display 137 displaying streets and towns cities 139 displaying town 139 list 139 map display 138 selecting 134 selecting criteria 134 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG RSC Runflat System Component refer to R
134. audio files any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed e g the name of the artist Stop sampling Press the controller Press the controller Select Details and press the controller p Select Scan and press the controller 5 IN Track sampling is interrupted and the selected track is played on t Root directory 4 Random all Repeat track Select the current track and press the con Repeat directary troller Lans gt Select the desired menu item 005 Track 5 To sample all the tracks in the current directory select Scan directory and The information is shown for the current track press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control cur To sample all the tracks on the CD rently in use select Scan all and press the control ler 1 All tracks on the current CD are automatically riaa Directory 4 sampled once in succession Mme Tone Select Set and press the controller Other menu items are displayed sean all Random directory 005 Track 5 Stop sampling Press the controller Select Scan directory or Scan all and press the controller Sampling is interrupted and the selected track is retained 165 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG CD player and CD changer Repeating tracks 1 Select Set and press the controller Other menu items are displayed To ne Scan
135. ay lighting If you activate the headlamp flasher after park ing the car with the lamps switched off the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time You can adjust the operating period or deacti vate the function iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller Door locks TPM O Triple turn signal oO Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 240 s O Welcome light ir e L mur e O 6 Select Pathway lighting and press the controller 7 Turn the controller to select the corre sponding duration 8 Press the controller to apply the setting The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Daytime running lamps The daytime running lamps light up in switch position 0 1 and 3 They are less powerful than the low beams Activating deactivating daytime running lamps iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 If
136. ay not be able to detect a puncture refer to page 87 Your BMW center will be glad to advise you Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Recommendedtire brands Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire When properly used these tires meet the high est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions Although all season M S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold weather performance as winter tires Pay attention to speed Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car failure to do so could result in tire damage and acci dents lt If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Always protect tires against all contact with oil grease and fuels Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the sidewall of the tire Swapping wheels between ax
137. be moved lt 4 42 Convenient operation with remote control or via door lock Refer to pages 30 and 32 Closing manually Only close the convertible top manually if itis absolutely necessary and never open it manually The convertible top box cover can not be locked if there is an electrical defect and would then open while the vehicle is in motion Incorrect handling can result in damage 4 Closing the convertible top manually should be performed by two people The rear seats must not be occupied Before closing 1 Ifpossible close all windows and then lower the rear windows by approx 3 4 in 2 cm After you manually unlock the convertible top box cover the windows can no longer be operated 2 Open the luggage compartment lid If there is an electrical fault unlock the lid using the integrated key refer to page 33 3 Take the Allen wrench and screwdriver out of the onboard tool kit refer to page 223 fre X 4 Using the screwdriver loosen the two but tons in the cargo bay arrows 1 and pull them out forcefully as far as they will go The convertible top box cover is unlocked 5 Close the luggage compartment lid After the convertible top box cover is unlocked manually the luggage compartment lid can only be opened using the integrated key Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Closing ie 2 3 Open the doors Slide the protective cap arrow 2 forward Slowly an
138. cargo loading 117 decommissioning refer to Vehicle storage dimensions 237 Identification Number refer to Engine compartment 213 parking 59 weight 239 Vehicle Tires for unlocking 30 Vehicle jack 227 Vehicle position refer to Displaying current position 144 Vehicle storage 222 Ventilation 100 draft free 100 Ventilation when parked refer to Parked car ventilation 101 Vents refer to Ventilation 100 Vent settings 98 Voice commands overview 23 short commands 240 Voice instructions from navigation system 140 muting 54 140 repeating 54 140 switching on off 54 140 volume 140 Voice phone book 188 Volume 150 audio sources 150 fuel tank refer to Capacities 239 mobile phone 181 speed dependent control 151 voice instructions 140 Volume distribution front rear 151 left right 151 W Warning and indicator lamps 13 Warning messages refer to Check Control 77 Warning triangle 230 Washer fluid 64 content of the reservoir 64 Washer fluid filler neck 64 Waste tray refer to Ashtray 107 Water on roads refer to Driving through water 116 Water penetration 219 220 Waveband with the radio 154 Wear indicators in tires refer to Minimum tread depth 209 Weights 239 Welcome lamps 92 Wheelbase refer to Dimensions 237 Wheels new 210 Wheels and tires 204 Width refer to Dimensions 237 Windows 38
139. chool to pick up a child gt Upto 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off gt While the engine is at operating tempera ture gt As long as battery voltage is sufficient gt Atan outside temperature below 77 F 25 C The LED is lit when the function is on As of radio readiness you can set the interior temperature air flow rate and air distribution Windows defrosting and removing condensation lt Quickly removes ice and conden a sation from the windshield and front side windows Switch on the cooling function as well 100 Switching cooling function on off The cooling function cools and ser dehumidifies the incoming air ij before reheating it as required according to the temperature setting This function is only available while the engine is running The cooling function helps prevent condensa tion on the windows or removes it quickly Depending on the weather the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program Rear window defroster The defroster is switched off auto matically after a certain time d Depending on your vehicle s equipment the upper wires serve as an antenna and are not part of the rear win dow defroster Ventilation 1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open and close the air vents 2 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow
140. cluded depending on the circum stances The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi tive individuals This effect is usually only tem porary For airbag locations and additional information on airbags refer to page 89 Head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx ear level Oth erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident 4 v i O Head restraints refer to page 47 Safety belt Before every drive make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device but they do not represent a substitute Your vehicle has four seats each of which is equipped with a safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt Never allow infants or small children to ride in a passenger s lap Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen The safety belt must not rest against the throat run across sharp edges pass over hard or frag ile objects or be pinched Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted Other wise the belt could slide over your hips and injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal col
141. com to obtain this information Viscosity ratings Viscosity is a measure of an oil s flow rating and is categorized in SAE classes Selecting the appropriate SAE class depends on the regional climatic conditions in which you normally drive your BMW m Approved oils belong to the 5W 40 and 5W 30 classes lt 4 These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures BMW recommends Castrol 215 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Under the hood Coolant Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot Escaping coolant can cause burns lt 4 Coolant consists of half water and half additive Not all commercially available additives are suit able for your BMW Ask your BMW center for suitable additives Only use suitable additives otherwise engine damage may result Because additives are harmful to your health it is impor tant to follow the instructions on the contain ers lt 4 Comply with the appropriate environ mental protection regulations when dis posing of coolant additives lt Checking coolant level 1 Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down 2 Turnthe cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape then continue turning to open 3 The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck refer also to
142. d braking maneuvers To do so keep an adequate dis tance to the forward vehicle A defensive and smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption down Avoid high engine speeds Only use first gear when setting off In second and higher gears accelerate without hesitation or pauses When accelerating shift up before reaching high engine speeds When you reach the desired speed shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con stant speed As a rule driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear Coasting When approaching a red light take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high est applicable gear On a downhill slope take your foot off the accel erator and coast in a suitable gear The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting Switch off the engine during lengthy stops Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods e g at traffic lights railroad crossings or in traffic congestions You achieve fuel sav ings even if standing time is as short as approx 4 seconds Switch off functions you do not need at the moment Functions such as the air conditioner and the seat or rear window heating draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel Espe cially in city traffic and in stop and go driving they have a considerable impact Therefore switch these functions off when they are not really needed
143. d smoothly open the convertible top box cover all the way arrow 3 The locking pins must have engaged com pletely If they are still visible close the con vertible top box cover as far as necessary until the locking bolts engage audibly then slowly open the cover During this process do not close the convertible top box cover completely X gt Lift out the front part of the convertible top arrows 4 on both sides and swing it for ward At the same time keep the convertible top box cover from closing e g using your shoulder 6 10 Position the rear convertible top frame upright arrow 5 and close the convertible top box cover arrow 6 Then lower the rear convertible top frame LL e tea mur e O Together with another person press down the front convertible top frame from the out side and on both sides as far as possible Carefully remove the cover in the center of the front convertible top frame using the screwdriver Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the Allen wrench and insert the wrench into the opening provided Turn the Allen wrench all the way to the left arrow 7 until the front convertible top frame is locked to the windshield frame The rear convertible top frame is automatically pressed down onto the convertible top box cover and is sealed tight under tension The closing procedure must be fully com pleted otherwise damage or injury may occur 4 Plea
144. ddress book refer to OFFICE page 130 PETER Select the entry and press the controller The current position can be transferred to the To start destination guidance address book Select Start guidance and press the control ler Select Address book and press the con troller Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top Turn the controller until New address is selected and press the control ler Address book A D 3 P RST W Z Edit address Delete address JULIA PETER oe Address book A D P RST W Z Home address Name z ADAM Select Address book and press the con troller DR TOM Select the entry and press the controller Select Use current location as address and press the controller The name given can be changed For oper 132 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Edit address and press the con until Delete data is selected and press the troller controller g Address book a a ghting Door locks A D J P RST W 2 Delete address book E tart quidance i Delete address JULIA PETER Change entry Select Delete address book and press the For operation refer to Entering a destina controller tion manually page 123 Select Yes and press the controller Select Store in address book and press the controller You can store your current position or the cur rent destination as the home
145. desired setting Press the controller is selected The spatial sound effect is switched on To switch off the spatial sound effect Select Off and press the controller You can reset all tone settings to the default setting 152 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 1 Open the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller At a glance Select Audio and press the controller 5 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Reset is selected and press the con troller la yalizer Surround Settings p Driving tips 6 In vehicles equipped with two drives Select Yes and press the controller NET EL COIA EI T ad ta T oid LL Communications Mobility Reference 153 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG f Radio Radio Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands Listening to the radio Press the button if the sound output is switched off iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to call up Entertainment 3 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Select FM or AM AM SAT CD AUX Presets Ic 5 59 i T KROQ 8 100
146. dlamp flasher 94 0 Fog lamps 95 Lamp flashes A DSC or DTC is regulating the propul sive forces in order to maintain driving stability 83 Canada parking brake applied 59 BRAKE Parking brake applied 59 F Canada engine malfunction with E adverse effect on exhaust emissions 218 SERVICE Engine malfunction with adverse FAAN effect on exhaust emissions 218 13 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Communications Entertainment v O S D i lt Driving tips AENA ELOLA v Oo v V W v x Around the center console controls and displays ETS Li a ati il T i A Q ae S 5 B1 o OO 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 1 Coupe microphone for voice command 13 Changing z system and for telephone in hands free gt Radiostation 150 D ne gt Track 150 Convertible microphone on steering col umn 14 Selecting radio CD and CD changer 2 SOS initiating an Emergency Request 15 Selecting AM or FM waveband call 229 16 Ejecting navigation DVD 3 Reading lamps 96 a 17 4 Coupe glass roof electric 39 i Heated seats 49 a ROT AMER ai Convertible opening the convert 6 Passenger airbag status lamp 90 Aa ible top 41 7 Control Display 16 Convertible closing the convertible 8 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 83 A2 top 41 9 Hazard warning flashers 18 Controller 16
147. ds This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached Should corrosion form on the brake rotors the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure When the vehicle is parked Condensation forms while the automatic cli mate control is in operation and then exits under the vehicle Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal Before driving into a car wash General information on caring for your BMW can be found on page 219 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG With convenient access and automatic transmission Insert the remote control into the ignition switch The engine can be switched off when the selec tor lever is in position N Refer also to page 37 Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity never over load the vehicle Overloading can lead to over heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires This can ultimately result in a sudden blow out 4 Make sure that no liquids are spilled or leak from their containers in the cargo bay as this could result in damage to the vehi cle lt Determining loading limit Ji 1 Locate the following statement on your vehicle s placard The combined weight of occupants A and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY
148. e Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG until Enabled Assist services is selected and press the controller Assist pro Enable services Currently no services enabled Select Enable services and press the con troller BMW Assist is activated and data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins i Enabled services gt Progress LILILILL Data exchange active Activation takes a few minutes Progress status is displayed on the Control Display If you open another menu the activation process continues in the background When BMW Assist is enabled you can have the system display the Telematics ID The Telematics ID identifies your vehicle These data are transmitted to your BMW center Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Communication oe Navigation 4 Entertainment Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Into sources Display oP lt Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Ai 1 _ i Venicle Tires Language Units Time Date Select BMW Service settings and press the controller fee Settings AS Vehicle Tires a9 Language Units fee Time Date Mak Traffic info settings i Bluetooth If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller 197 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW A
149. e brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on 1 Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the brightness level and the word SET 2 Press button 2 a e mur e O 3 Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level 4 Press button 2 The display again shows the outside tem perature and the time Interior lamps The interior lamps footwell lamps entry lamps cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps are controlled automatically The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors gt To avoid draining the battery all lamps inside the car are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off refer to Start stop button on page 58 4 Switching interior lamps on off manually a Interior lamps front and rear To switch on and off press the button To switch off the interior lamps footwell lamps entry lamps and courtesy lamps per manently press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds 95 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Lamps Reading lamps y There are reading lamps at the front and rear next to the interior lamps To switch on and off press the button 96 Online Edition for P
150. e controller until Languages is selected and press the controller Units Text language English US O Navigation voice instructians G7 Arrow display pop up instructions 6 Select Text language and press the con troller You can switch to another language for the display texts and navigation mes sages 7 Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller Brightness of the Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions Note however that you can change the basic setting while the low beams are switched on The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 80 iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Open the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller ren Select Display settings and press the controller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Brightness is selected and press the controller Display min 6 Turnthe controller until the desired setting is reached Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Technology for driving comfort and safety Park Distance Control PDC The concept The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle Four ultrasonic sensors
151. e ignition is switched off 65 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Display in the instrument cluster C a u A When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling is stored or when a stored speed is called up the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster 66 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control Odometer outside temperature display clock B012345mis 6789 E 2 3 1 Knob in the instrument cluster 2 Outside temperature and clock 3 Odometer and trip odometer Knob in the instrument cluster gt Toreset the trip odometer while the ignition is switched on gt To display the time outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off Units of measure To select the respective units of measure miles or km for the odometer as well as F or C for the outside temperature refer to Units of mea sure on page 1 The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Time outside temperature display Setting the time refer to page 75 Outside temperature warning When the displayed temperature sinks to approx 37 F 3 C a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up There is an increased risk of black ice Black ice can also form at temperatures above 37 F 3 C You should there fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads for example otherwise
152. e left right forwards and backwards 7 Press the controller c e _ gt The map for destination entry can also be called up in the map display Select the symbol and press the controller 5 Press the controller to transfer the destina tion for destination guidance or to store it The selected destination and other menu items are displayed Selecting destination using information You can have a list of selected destinations dis played e g hotels sights or hospitals and 5 transfer them for destination guidance 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Select Information and press the control ler 4 bok i Traffic Info On destination On location On a new destination 129 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Destination entry 3 Select location gt On destination gt On location gt On anew destination oP Information b On destination On a EAN destination Press the controller 5 Make your selection e g Hotels and res taurants and press the controller 6 Enter search criteria if necessary e g the maximum distance from your location 7 Select lt Start search gt and press the con troller Destinations are shown on the Control Dis play 1 3 of 22 LAX OS ANGELES CA amp 9 5 mis STAR HOTEL BEVERLY HILLS BEVERLY HILLS GRETZKY BLVD 7 1 mis BELLA VISTA HOTEL AEVERLY HI
153. e on For better control Me Ifthe indicator lamp flashes A DTC is regulating the drive and braking L forces DTC Ifthe indicator lamps are on i DTC has been activated DTC Deactivating DTC Press the button again the DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out Drive off assistant The drive off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this 1 Hold the car in place by depressing the brake 2 Release the brake and drive off without delay The drive off assistant holds the car in place for approx 2 seconds after the brake is released Drive off without delay after releasing the brake Otherwise the drive off 83 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Technology for driving comfort and safety assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards 4 Flat Tire Monitor FTM The concept The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss ina tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the individual tires while moving In the event of pressure loss the rolling circum ference changes and thus the rotating speed of the affected wheel This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire the system must be initialized for the cor rect tire inflati
154. e previous seat position is reached the seat will stop at its current position a e mur e O When sliding the seat backward make sure no one is injured and no objects are damaged Before driving off engage both seats and back rests so that they are locked in place Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement lt Heated seats O CCC oor a Press once for each temperature level Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature To switch off Press button longer If you continue driving within approx 15 minutes the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power The LEDs stay lit Seat and mirror memory You can store and call up two different combi nations of driver s seat and exterior mirror positions 49 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Adjustments Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup port are not stored in memory Storing MEM 1 ws 1 Switch on radio readiness or the ignition refer to page 58 2 Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions 3 Press the MB button The LED in the button lights up 4 Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 the LED goes out Call up FN Do not call up memory while you are driv Ing otherwise unexpected seat move m
155. e rear windows cannot be closed automatically Jointly a gt Press the switch to the resistance point All windows open as long as you press the switch gt Press the switch beyond the resistance point All windows open automatically Press the switch again to stop the opening move ment gt Pull the switch All windows close as long as you pull the switch Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni tion is switched off you can still operate the windows for approx 1 minute as long as no door has been opened Convenient operation For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock refer to page 29 or 32 For information on closing with conve nient access refer to Locking on page 36 Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a power window closes the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly Despite the pinch protection system EN check and clear the window s travel path prior to closing it otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc tions such as thin objects and the window would continue closing Do not install any accessories that might inter fere with window movement Otherwise the pinch protection system could be impaired Convertible the rear windows are not equipped with pinch prot
156. e vehicle is stationary N Neutral You can select this in a car wash for example The vehicle can roll D Drive automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation All for ward gears are selected automatically v i O Under normal operating conditions fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi tion D Kick down Kick down enables you to achieve maximum performance Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full throttle resistance point Sport program and manual operation M S Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M S shifting slot The sport program is activated and DS is dis played on the instrument cluster This position is recommended for a performance oriented driving style To use the automatic mode again move the selector lever to the right into position D Shifting gears via the selector lever When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear M1 through M6 are displayed on the instrument cluster 61 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG iving Dr Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed thus for example a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru ment cluster foll
157. ect Unlock button and press the con troller 8 Select amenu item gt All doors Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle gt Driver s door only Press the j button once to unlock only the driver s door and the fuel filler door Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle 2 Door locks Central locking iE All doors After door opene All doors Driver s door only O Relock door if not opened O Lock after driving 9 Press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 30 Coupe convenient opening Hold the j button down The windows and the glass roof are opened Convertible convenient opening You can open the convertible top using the remote control for convenient access within a range of approx 13 ft 4 m from the vehicle Hold the button down The windows and the convertible top are opened provided that the doors are closed If you continue pressing the button the win dows move up Watch during the opening process to ensure that no one is injured Releasing the button interrupts the opening process 4 Locking Press the Lock button Convertible convenient closing You can close the convertible top and the win dows using the remote control for convenient access within a range of approx 13 ft 4 m from the vehicle Hold the Lock button down The convertible top and the windows are closed A
158. ect current speed 79 Selecting a country for navigation 124 Selecting an audio source 150 Selecting menu items 19 Selecting new scale for navigation 139 Selector lever automatic transmission with Steptronic 61 Service 214 Service refer to Roadside Assistance 229 Service car refer to Roadside Assistance 229 Service data in remote control 217 Service Info 73 193 Service Interval Display refer to Condition Based Service CBS 217 Service Request 186 193 Service requirement display refer to Condition Based Service CBS 217 Service requirements 73 193 214 Service requirements 72 Set date 76 Set time 76 Settings 197 Settings clock 12h 24h format 76 date format 77 Settings for unlocking 30 Setting times refer to Preselecting switch on times 101 Shifting gears with automatic transmission with Steptronic 61 Shiftlock refer to Changing selector lever positions 61 Short commands for the voice command system 240 Shortest route in navigation refer to Selecting route 134 Short route in navigation 134 Show current position 129 Show destination position 129 Shuffled refer to Random CD changer 166 CD player 166 Side airbags 89 Side windows refer to Windows 38 Signal horn refer to Horn 10 Sitting safely 45 airbags 45 Safety belt 45 Ski bag 109 Sliding tilt sunroof refer to Glass roof electric 39 Slot for remote control 58 Sm
159. ection Therefore watch them closely when closing to avoid personal injury 4 Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger or if ice on the win dows etc prevents you from closing the win dows normally proceed as follows 1 Pullthe switch past the resistance point and hold it there Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value 2 Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx 4 seconds and hold it there The window closes without pinch protection Coupe glass roof electric To prevent injuries watch the glass roof while closing it Take the remote control with you when you leave the car otherwise children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves lt 4 Raising Press the switch gt The closed glass roof is raised and the slid ing visor opens slightly gt The open glass roof automatically travels into the raised position The sliding visor remains completely open Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with the roof in the raised position as this would damage the mechanism 4 Opening closing gt Press the switch backwards to the resis tance point The glass roof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position gt Press the switch backwards past the resis tance point The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically Briefly press the
160. efer to page 116 Electronic brake force distribution EBV The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior Dynamic Brake Control DBC When you apply the brakes rapidly this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short est possible braking distance during full brak ing This system exploits all of the benefits pro vided by ABS Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application Dynamic Stability Control DSC DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel erate The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels In these cases DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the indi vidual wheels The laws of physics cannot be repealed even with DSC An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver Therefore do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks as this could result in an accident lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Deactivating DSC Press the button for at least 3 seconds the indi cator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster light up Dynamic Tracti
161. ehicle s Bluetooth range via the hands free system as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on Depending on your mobile phone the system automatically switches to hands free mode With mobile phones that do not automatically switch to hands free mode Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using it may be possible to continue the conversation via the hands free system Refer to the display on your mobile phone Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG and or your mobile phone s operating instructions gt Press the button above the storage compartment From hands free system to mobile phone If you are making a call via the hands free sys tem it may be possible to continue the call via the mobile phone depending on your mobile phone model Refer to the display on your mobile phone and or your mobile phone s oper ating instructions Alternatively you can deactivate the Bluetooth link Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using it may occur that calls are switched from the hands free system to the mobile phone if reception of the wireless network is poor Operation by voice commands The concept You can operate your mobile phone without having to take a hand off the steering wheel During your entries you will be guided in many cases by announcements or questions The same prerequisites apply as for operation via iDrive refer to page 181 Symbols
162. elect Dial number and press the control ler Alternatively press the fj button on the steering wheel me Phone gt Dial 0123456769 ABCDEFGHIKL i 08917345678 For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your provider You can store phone numbers on the program mable memory keys to call these numbers directly refer to page 21 Press the gf button on the steering wheel Alternatively Select the phone number and press the controller T Phone 1 Active calls End call is selected Press the controller ifn Phone Active calls T Z ozo Keypad Phone numbers you have dialed received calls and phone book entries are stored in lists when the mobile phone is linked to the vehicle via Bluetooth If the caller is listed in the phone book the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection Five lists are available A Z The entries in your mobile phone s phone 183 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning book consisting of names and phone num 4 Select the desired entry and press the con bers are sorted alphabetically troller gt Top 8 a The eight numbers dialed most frequently a Phone D from the A Z phone book are automati ee ae cally sto
163. em is logged onto a mobile phone network gt The Emergency Request system is opera ble Once your service contract for BMW Assist expires the BMW Assist system can be deacti vated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated Emergency Requests are not possible The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed Sending an Emergency Request 1 Briefly press the cover flap to open 2 Press the SOS button for at least 2 seconds The LED in the button lights up As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established the LED flashes Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you Even if you are unable to respond the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions If the circumstances allow this remain in the vehicle until the connection has been estab lished You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation If the current location of your vehicle can be determined it will be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands free system it is possible that the hands free system is malfunctioning You may s
164. en selected Select the desired category and press the controller Select SAT and press the controller i SAT Categories FM AM Categories Rock Jazz Country Lawn Pop The channels of this category are displayed Channels and categories are displayed on f Select a channel marked with this sym the Control Display bol Select a menu item Presets Up to twelve channels you stored previ ously CH 001 Channel A All channels Tr TH 0 Channel g All channels are displayed F CH 003 Channel C Categories CH 004 Channel D All channels sorted by category e g CH 005 Channel E news jazz FIT Press the controller i D SAT al Other menu items are displayed Allchannels Presets Select Details and press the controller Rock Jazz Country Latin Pop FH ANT Channel hannel B nannel C hannel D cnannel E Store Press the controller Tone ESN The name of the channel and additional infor mation on the current track are displayed e g the name of the artist 161 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Satellite radio Changing channels with buttons on CD player Jazz Channel B q za Press the button for the corre Elton John sponding direction Rocket Man The system switches to the next enabled chan nel Notes When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal 1 Artist IS received a message appe
165. ent could result in an accident lt Convenience mode 1 Unlock and open the driver s door or switch on radio readiness refer to page 58 2 Lightly push the desired memory button 1 or 2 The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons Safety feature 1 Close the driver s door and switch the igni tion on or off refer to page 58 2 Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed If the button was pressed accidentally Press the button again the LED goes out 50 Call up with the remote control The driver s seat position last stored is stored for the remote control currently in use Youcan select the occasion on which the seat is reset to that position gt Call up when the vehicle is unlocked gt Call up when the driver s door is opened FN When this Personal Profile function is used first make sure that the footwell behind the driver s seat is free of obstacles Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat lt 4 The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons Selecting automatic call up iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings
166. ents refer to Switching voice instructions on off 140 Navigation drive location 122 Navigation DVD 122 drive 150 Navigation system 122 address book 131 changing a route 141 destination entry 123 destination list 130 displaying current position 144 entering a destination manually 123 127 last destinations 130 navigation DVD 122 opening 123 route display 137 route list 139 searching for a special destination 129 selecting destination using information 129 selecting destination via map 128 selecting route criteria 134 starting destination guidance 136 switching off refer to Terminating continuing destination guidance 136 terminating continuing destination guidance 136 voice instructions 140 volume adjustment 140 Navigation voice instructions 139 Navigation voice instructions via buttons on steering wheel 53 Neck support refer to Head restraints 47 Nets refer to Storage compartments 107 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG New address in navigation 132 New destination 124 128 New route 141 New tires 210 Next entertainment source 54 North facing map 138 Number of cylinders refer to Engine data 236 O OBD socket refer to Socket for On Board Diagnosis 218 Octane ratings refer to Fuel specifications 202 Odometer 67 Oil refer to Engine oil 213 Oil consumption 213
167. er s safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child restraint systems To lock the safety belt 1 Secure the child restraint system with the belt 2 Pull the belt strap all the way out 55 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Transporting children safely 3 Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child restraint system The safety belt is locked To unlock the safety belt 1 Open the belt buckle 2 Remove the child restraint system 3 Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil dren To install and use the LATCH child restraint system follow the operating and safety instructions provided by the manufac turer of the system otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised 4 Before installing the child seat pull the belt out of the area for the child restraint fixing system Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors EN are correctly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised 4 Coupe rear seats The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protec tive Caps 56 Convertible rear seats lt gt oi i Es lt os lt LS oeie The anchor points for the lower LATCH
168. er to Around the center console 14 Communication 182 192 1 93 194 195 Compact disc refer to CD changer 163 CD player 163 Compartment for remote control refer to Ignition lock 58 Compass 105 Computer 68 displays on Control Display 69 hour signal 76 Computer refer to iDrive 16 Concert hall for Tone control 152 Concierge 195 Concierge service 195 Condensation refer to When the vehicle is parked 116 Condition Based Service CBS 217 Configuring settings refer to Personal Profile 28 Confirmation signals for locking unlocking the vehicle 31 Connecting vacuum cleaner refer to Connecting electrical appliances 108 Consumption refer to Average fuel consumption 69 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Continue guidance to destination 137 Control Center refer to iDrive 16 Control Display 16 Controller refer to iDrive 16 Controls and displays 10 Convenient access 36 replacing the battery 37 Convenient operation windows 30 windows with convenient access 36 with convenient access 36 Convenient starting refer to Starting the engine 59 Convertible rollover protection system 90 top 40 wind deflector 44 Convertible top convenient opening 30 Convertible top care 220 Coolant 216 checking level 216 filling 216 Coolant temperature 68 Cooling maximum 98 Cooling fluid refer to Coolant 216 C
169. es 94 Malfunction The LED next to the symbol for automatic head lamp control flashes Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed Have the system checked as soon as possible High beams roadside parking lamps 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Roadside parking lamps Roadside parking lamps left or right There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked Switching on After parking the vehicle press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for approx 1 second arrow 3 gt The roadside parking lamps drain the bat tery Therefore do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time otherwise the bat tery might not have enough power to start the engine 4 Switching off Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point arrow 3 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Fog lamps a To switch on off press the button _ The parking lamps or low beams must ZD be switched on for the fog lamps to operate The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on The fog lamps are switched off while you acti vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams gt If the automatic headlamp control is acti vated the low beams will come on auto matically when you switch on the fog lamps lt 4 Instrument lighting You can adjust th
170. es are cold This means after a maximum of 1 25 miles 2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours When tires are warm the tire inflation pressure is higher gt After correcting the tire inflation pressure reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor refer to page 86 or the Flat Tire Monitor refer to page 84 4 Inflation pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature gt The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recom mended by BMW alist of these is available from your BMW center lt For correct identification of the right tire infla tion pressures observe the following 204 gt Tire sizes for your vehicle gt Load conditions gt Maximum allowable driving speed Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km h For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km h and to achieve optimum driving comfort adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres sures listed on the following pages in the col umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km h These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver s side door post when the driver s door is open The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or 160 km h Do not exceed this speed otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur 4 Tire inflat
171. esetst SAT radio all channels SAT radio categories CD menus CD CD changer menu CD changer CD 1 6 CD track lt CD 1 6 track lt gt Track Audio Aux ont Command Vent settings Automatic programs Command Settings menus Info sources Settings Door locks Steering wheel buttons lt Lighting BMW Servicet Service requirements lt Service gt Check Control messages Brightness lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Toopen Units 71 To open Language 80 140 To open Time 75 To open Date 76 Toopen PDC 81 Toopen FIM 84 Units lt Languages Time lt Date lt PDC FTM 243 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG At a glance Controls Driving tips Navigation oO i par Eu Oo Par LLI Communications Mobility Reference Everything from A Z Everything from A Z Index a Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and refers you to the page where these texts can be found A ABS Antilock Brake System 82 Accessories refer to The individual vehicle 5 Accident reporting refer to Emergency Request 229 Activated charcoal filter 101 Activation time for parked car ventilation 101 Active steering 88 Adaptive Head Light 94 Add digits on the mobile phone 184 Additives coolant 216 en
172. fer to page 36 1 Depress the brake 2 Depress the clutch and shift to neutral posi tion 3 Press the start stop button The starter operates automatically for a certain time and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started Automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or with con venient access inside the vehicle refer to page 36 1 Depress the brake 2 Move the selector lever to position P 3 Press the start stop button The starter operates automatically for a certain time and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started v i O Switching off the engine Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle When parking apply the parking brake force fully otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll lt Manual transmission 1 With the car at a standstill press the start stop button 2 Shift into first gear or reverse 3 Forcefully apply the parking brake 4 Removing the remote control from the igni tion lock refer to page 58 Automatic transmission 1 With the car at a standstill move the selec tor lever to position P 2 Press the start stop button 3 Forcefully apply the parking brake 4 Removing the remote control from the igni tion lock refer to page 58 Parking brake The parking brake is primarily intended to pre vent the vehicle from rolling while parked it brakes the rear wheels Indicato
173. ffic obstructions on the original route Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction the calculated route may lead through the traffic obstruction Displaying current position You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top Turn the controller until Cur rent position is selected and press the controller Navigation New destination eSA4NTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY W Route preference Mictive Arrow display 144 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0014 954 02 08 BMW AG The current position of your BMW is displayed lt Ch e Longitude 36 67 00 Latitude 67 68 00 N Altitude 1122 ft If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city your current map coordinates will appear To exit from the menu Select the 4 arrow and press the controller You can also have the current position dis played on a map refer to page 138 145 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG At a glance ki b E O Driving tips Navigation Communications Entertainment Mobility oO S Oo Bos Oo a What to do If What to do if What to do if gt a navigation DVD is inser
174. for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG S O Gen 3 ag Technical data Convertible i T qis a Fa w Le 104 7 2 660 A Le 172 2 4 373 All dimensions given in inches mm Smallest turning circle dia 35 ft 1 in 10 7 m 238 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Weights Coupe 128i 135i Curb weight gt with manual transmission lbs kg 3 252 1 475 3 373 1 530 gt with automatic transmission lbs kg 3 329 1 510 3 384 1 535 Approved gross weight gt with manual transmission lbs kg 4 134 1 875 4 255 1 930 gt with automatic transmission lbs kg 4 211 1 910 4 266 1 935 Load los kg 882 400 882 400 Approved front axle load lbs kg 2 028 920 2 116 960 Approved rear axle load lbs kg 2 249 1 020 2 249 1 020 Approved roof load capacity lbs kg 165 75 165 75 Cargo bay capacity cu ft liters 13 1 370 13 1 370 Convertible 128i 135i Curb weight gt with manual transmission lbs kg 3 494 1 585 3 660 1660 gt with automatic transmission lbs kg 8 5 1 1 620 3 671 1 665 Approved gross weight gt with manual transmission lbs kg 4 398 1 995 4 564 2 070 gt with automatic transmission lbs kg 4 475 2 030 4 575 2 075 Load lbs kg 904 410 904 410 Approved front axle load lbs kg 2 050 930 2 149 975 Approved rear axle load lbs kg 2 447 1 110 2 447 1 110 Approved roof load capacity los kg Cargo bay capacity cu ft liters 9 1 10 7 260 305 9 1 10 7 260 30
175. g O gt 143 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ion guidance Destinat Lane closure Delay gt Police checkpoint A SE Slow traffic or other traffic event Stop and go traffic PPP Stopped traffic Traffic events in both directions of travel Traffic information during destination guidance In the event of a traffic obstruction on the planned route the traffic information icons are shown with a red border System response will vary depending on whether or not Dynamic route is selected refer to page 134 Displaying traffic obstructions When the navigation system receives a traffic obstruction message and Dynamic route is not selected you are shown certain informa tion such as the length of the traffic congestion when you are approx 25 miles 40 km away from the traffic obstruction The last possible detour exit is indicated just before you reach it Us stopped traffic in 3mls Length 2 0 mis delay 36min Select Detour and press the controller The navigation system calculates a new route avoiding the congestion 1 This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control _ Display Dynamic route planning When Dynamic route is selected the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction The system does not point out tra
176. g procedure and when EN opening the convertible top watch the process and ensure that no one becomes trapped Releasing the key stops the opera tion 4 32 Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction you can lock and unlock the driver s door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit posi tions in the door lock Opening and closing From inside S e er This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid but does not acti vate the anti theft system The fuel filler door remains unlocked Automatic locking You can also set the situations in which the car locks iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Open the start menu Press the controller to open the menu Select Settings and press the controller E YY SS Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller 6 Select Central locking and press the con troller 7 Select a menuitem gt Relock door if not opened The central locking system automati Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG cally locks the vehicle after some time if no door has been opened gt Lock after driving The central locking system automati cally locks the vehicle as soon as you drive off Door locks
177. g your destination you can select from the following options gt Entering a destination manually see below gt Entering a destination by voice com mands refer to page 127 gt Selecting destination using information refer to page 129 gt Selecting destination from a list refer to Destination list page 130 gt Selecting destination from address book refer to page 131 gt Selecting home address refer to page 133 After selecting your destination you can pro ceed to start the destination guidance refer to page 136 You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys refer to page 21 Enter data only when the vehicle is sta tionary and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi tions and the instructions issued by the naviga tion system Otherwise vehicle occupants and other road users may be endangered 4 Opening navigation iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller to the right to call up Navigation Communication ER Climate Navigation ww Entertainment 3 Select Navigation and press the control ler CAEN New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA O gt Z Route preference Arrow display The following is di
178. ge 49 gt Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated refer to page 106 Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub stitute of another color or amperage rating oth erwise this could lead to a circuit overload ulti mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle lt In the glove compartment gt z O Accessing the fuse box 227 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Replacing components 1 Open the glove compartment 2 Remove the damper arrow 1 from the lower holder by applying forward pressure 3 Disengage the glove compartment by pressing on both tabs arrows 2 and fold it down Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set in holders on the distributor box Information on fuse assignment can be found next to the distributor box After replacing a fuse press the glove compart ment upward until it engages and reattach the damper 228 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Giving and receiving assistance Emergency Request Conditions for an Emergency Request gt Full preparation package mobile phone this equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle gt BMW Assist is activated Activating BMW Assist refer to page 196 gt Radio readiness is on gt The BMW Assist syst
179. ghest setting regardless of the outside temperature The lowest setting effects continuous cooling Maximum cooling At outside temperatures above 32 F 0 C and when the engine is running you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible The automatic climate control goes into recir culated air mode at the lowest temperature Air flows at maximum rate from the vents for the upper body area You should therefore open them for maximum cooling Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG AUTO program The AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and side windows towards the upper body area and into the footwell for you The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences as a result of seasonal changes e g sunlight or window condensation The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program Intensity of the AUTO program Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the intensity of the AUTO program The current setting is briefly displayed on the Control Dis play every time the button is pressed You can also set the intensity of the AUTO pro gram via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Call up Climate 3 Select Automatic programs and press the controller O soft O medium LY intensive O Convertible Select the
180. ght in the glove compartment comes on To prevent injury in the event of an acci dent while the vehicle is being driven close the glove compartment immediately after use Closing Fold cover up Locking To lock the glove compartment use the inte grated key of the remote control refer to page 28 LED hand lamp Coupe The LED hand lamp is stored in the glove com partment Convertible The LED hand lamp is located in a holder inside the glove compartment on the left side m Insert the hand lamp into the holder with the lens pointing toward the passenger compartment to ensure that the lamp cannot be switched on accidentally 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Center armrest Storage compartment The center armrest between the front seats contains a credit card holder and depending on the equipment version a compartment or a snap in adapter Opening Press the button see arrow Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car s loudspeaker system gt AUX In port refer to page 169 gt USB audio interface refer to page 170 Storage compartments inside the vehicle Compartments are located next to the steering column on the doors and in the center con sole There are nets on the front seat backrests Coupe clothes hooks There are clothes hooks in the rear
181. gine oil 215 Address book in navigation 131 Address for navigation deleting 133 entering 123 131 selecting 132 storing 131 storing current position 132 Add to destination list 126 Airbags 89 sitting safely 45 warning lamp 90 Air conditioner 97 Air distribution automatic 99 Air flow rate 99 Airing refer to Ventilation 100 Air outlets refer to Air vents 97 244 Air pressure checking refer to Tire inflation pressure 204 Air recirculation refer to Recirculated air mode 99 Air recirculation on off 53 Air vents 97 AKI refer to Fuel specifications 202 Alarm system 34 avoiding unintentional alarms 35 interior motion sensor 35 switching off an alarm 35 tilt alarm sensor 35 All channels for satellite radio 161 All season tires refer to Winter tires 211 All stations displaying with the radio 154 AM waveband 150 154 Ambient air refer to Recirculated air mode 99 Antenna for mobile phone 176 Antifreeze coolant 216 washer fluid 64 Antilock Brake System ABS 82 Anti theft alarm system refer to Alarm system 34 Anti theft system 29 Approved axle loads refer to Weights 239 Approved gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 239 Armrest refer to Center armrest 107 Arrival time computer 69 Arrival time refer to Starting destination guidance 136 Arrow display for navigation 137 Arrow display in naviga
182. gt Show visual warning for Park Distance Con trol PDC refer to page 81 gt Light settings gt Welcome lamps refer to page 92 gt Pathway lighting refer to page 93 gt Daytime running lamps refer to page 93 gt Automatic climate control AUTO program cooling function and automatic recircu lated air control activation deactivation temperature air flow rate and distribution refer to page 98 gt Entertainment gt Audio volume refer to page 151 gt Tone control refer to page 151 gt Speed dependent volume control refer to page 151 Central locking system The concept The central locking system functions when the driver s door is closed The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following gt Doors gt Luggage compartment lid gt Fuel filler door Operating from outside gt Via the remote control gt Via the door lock gt In cars with convenient access via the handles on the driver s and front passen ger s doors The anti theft system is also operated at the same time It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han dles In addition if the remote control is used the welcome lamps interior lamps and the door s courtesy lamps are switched on or off The alarm system is also armed or disarmed For further details on the alarm system refer to page 34 v i O Operating from inside By means of the button f
183. he controller Me display Info sources JA Audio Ja Display settings VS Steering wheel buttons WES Vehicle Tires a Language Units Jae Time Date Turn the controller until Language Units is selected and press the controller If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller 140 until Languages is selected and press the controller Units Text language English US DO Navigation voice instructions by Display arrow view Select Navigation voice instructions and press the controller Mi Languages English US D Display arrow view LY The voice instructions are switched on With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel you can also execute the following func tions refer to page Repeat the voice instruction Press the button Switch voice instructions on off Press the button for a longer period The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 1 Have the last voice instruction repeated if necessary 2 Turnthe button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Changing a route During destination guidance you can revise the navigation system s route
184. he controller 4 Select Stopwatch and press the control ler gt Starting stopping or resetting the stop watch gt Taking an interim time reading i G Car Data 4 Trip computer Limit Start 00 06 13 interim time 00 00 45 Reset Starting stopping or resetting gt Select Start and press the controller The stopwatch starts at the displayed time gt Select Reset and press the controller The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was running beforehand gt Select Stop and press the controller This stops the timer Taking an interim time reading Select Interim time and press the controller The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count 79 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch is running The stopwatch continues operation in the background lt 4 Altering settings Language on the Control Display The language of the Control Display can be set The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Language Units and press the controller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn th
185. he corresponding work on your vehicle per formed only by your BMW center or at a work shop that works according to BMW repair pro cedures with correspondingly trained personnel If this work is not carried out prop erly there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt Parts and accessories For your own safety use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso ries not approved by BMW BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi cle its operation or its occupants Original BMW Parts BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW together with professional advice on using these items are available from all BMW centers Installation and operation of non BMW approved accessories such as alarms radios amplifiers radar detectors wheels suspension components brake dust shields telephones including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna or tr
186. he panel of the cargo bay 2 Detach the bulb holder by pressing together the clips see arrows and remove it 3 Brake lamps and turn signal apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement 4 Backup lamp pull the bulb out of the socket and replace it 5 Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into place 6 Reattach the cover License plate lamps and center brake lamp These lamps use LED technology for operation In the event of a malfunction please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with Run Flat Tires as standard This removes the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85 The symbol identifying Run Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall refer to Run Flat Tires page 210 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa mount Run Flat Tires for your own safety In the event of a flat no spare wheel is available Your BMW center will be glad to advise you Refer also to New wheels and tires page 210 gt The tools for changing wheels are avail able as optional accessories from your
187. he system will recog nize the town city The system can suggest up to 20 destina tions that meet your entries Up to 6 entries at a time appear on the Control Display 5 j lati p k 1 4 E 2 BEVERLY HILLS CALIFORNIA 3 BEVERLY HILLS FLORIDA 4 BEVERLY HILLS MICHIGAN 5 BEVERLY HILLS MISSOURI 6 BEVERLY HILLS TEXAS wt The system suggests a location 2 Select location gt To select highlighted town city Yes gt To select other town city Not gt To select an entry e g Entry 3 gt To show other entries in the list Next page gt To respell the town city Repeat The town city can also be selected from the list via iDrive Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller Entering the destination as an entire word The names of towns cities and streets located in the region in which the language of the voice command system is spoken can be entered as an entire word Example to enter a U S destination as an entire word the system language must be English Speak smoothly and at normal volume and avoid excessive emphases and pauses 127 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG c e 2 gt Destination entry 1 Wait for the system to ask for the town city of destination ai 2 Say the name of the destination town city The system can suggest up to 6 destina tions that fit your e
188. hicle 5 Passenger side mirror tilt function 52 Pathway lighting 93 Pathway lighting 93 PDC 81 Personal Profile 28 Perspective 138 Phone book 181 Phone numbers deleting from phone book 185 dialing 183 most recent numbers 184 selecting in phone book 184 Top 8 184 Pinch protection system glass roof electric 40 windows 39 Placing a call refer to telephone owner s manual Play for satellite radio 161 Polish 222 Pollen refer to Microfilter activated charcoal filter 101 Position displaying 144 saving refer to Storing current position 132 Power windows 38 Power windows refer to Windows 38 Presets displaying with the radio 154 Presets for satellite radio 161 Pressure tires 204 Pressure monitoring of tires refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 Pressure monitoring of tires refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85 Programmable buttons on the steering wheel 11 Programmable memory keys 21 Protection function refer to Pinch protection system glass roof electric 40 windows 39 Providing medical assistance refer to First add pouch 230 Puncture Flat Tire Monitor 84 V O z 2 253 U ad Everything from A Z R Radio autostore 155 controls 150 High Definition Radio 157 listening to stations 154 sampling stations 155 satellite radio 160 selecting a waveband 150 154 selecting the frequenc
189. hods Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise dam age may result lt With a tow bar The towing vehicle must not be lighter d than the towed vehicle otherwise it may be impossible to maintain control 4 The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles Should it prove impossi ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle please observe the following gt Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering gt The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset FN Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage lt With a tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle make sure that the tow rope is taut FN To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when towing always use nylon ropes or nylon straps 232 Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage lt With a tow truck Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so called lift bar or on a flat bed Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn Tow starting Avoid tow starting the vehicle whenever possi ble instead jump start the engine refer to page 230 Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow started when the engine is cold
190. ht Attach the cover by positioning the bottom edge first and then turning both locks all the way to the right Tail lamps gt Turn signal PY21W bulb 21 watts gt Backup lamp W16W bulb 16 watts gt Brake lamps P21W bulb 21 watts gt Brake Force Display lamp 1 H21W bulb 21 watts Inner brake lamp 2 Outer brake lamp 225 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Replacing components 3 Lateral reflector 4 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED 5 Reflector 6 Turn signal 7 Backup lamp 8 Brake Force Display lamp Replacing tail lamps Outer brake lamp N The outer brake lamp can be accessed through a single socket The figure shows the right side of the vehicle 1 Remove the cover from the panel of the cargo bay 2 Turn the bulb holder to the left see arrow and remove it 3 Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace ment 4 Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction 5 Reattach the cover The roadside parking lamp tail lamp uses LED design After replacing the bulb ensure that the bulb holder is properly seated otherwise the roadside parking lamp tail lamp may not work 4 226 Inner brake lamp turn signal backup lamp and Brake Force Display lamp The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder 1 Remove the cover from t
191. iately If you do not want to start destination guid ance right away Select Add to destination list and press Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG the controller The destination is stored in the destination list refer to page 130 Entering a destination by voice commands You can enter a desired destination via the voice command system During the destination input you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time To do so reactivate the voice command system if necessary You can have the possible commands read aloud via Options 1 Press the ES button on the steering wheel or in the center console we 2 Enter address ian Enter address Town City Street House number Intersection Selecting country 1 Wait for the system to ask for the country of destination p 2 Say the name of the destination coun try Say the name of the destination country in the language of the voice command system Entering a destination The destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word Spelling the destination To enter a destination spell it in the way it is commonly spelled in the destination country Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume avoiding excessive emphases and pauses nf 1 To spell the name of a town city Say at least the first three letters of the town city The more letters you say the more accurately t
192. icle paintwork Therefore it is important to adapt the frequency and scope of car care accordingly Immediately remove very aggressive sub stances e g spilled fuel oil grease tree resin or bird droppings to prevent damage to the paintwork Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Repairing paintwork damage Immediately repair scratches or similar damage such as that caused by stones hitting the vehicle where necessary to prevent rusting 4 BMW recommends having paintwork damage repaired by a professional paint repair work shop according to BMW specifications using original BMW paint materials Preservation A preservation treatment is necessary when water no longer beads off of the clean paintwork surface Only use products for paintwork pres ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes Rubber seals Treat only with water or rubber care products FN Do not use silicon containing care prod ucts on rubber seals otherwise noise and damage could occur lt 4 Chrome parts Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radia tor grill door handles or window frames with copious quantities of water and a shampoo additive For additional treatment use a chrome polish Light alloy wheels For technical reasons dust is generated during braking that is deposited on the light alloy wheels Remove the dust regularly using acid free rim cleaner Do not use aggressive acidic
193. imate i menu Fa Menu tem Menu tem k Settings Menu item 5 Menu item amp Meru item 7 1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon tal or vertical lists 2 Inthese lists arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible 3 Settings are represented graphically or as numerical values Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Operating principle at a glance The following is a general description of opera tions using iDrive For an exemplary step by step application refer to page 75 v O S D i lt ENET ial at Menu item 2 Menuiterm4 Settings Driving tips Manu iter 4 Keer tern 5 Menu item f Meru item AENA ELOLA Menu itema Ment item Manua item amp Miori item 7 Menu thei g Mers therm 9 Communications Entertainment 1 Selecting a menu item 4 Switching between fields gt Turn the controller the highlight marker gt Briefly move the controller to the left moves right forward or backward gt Menu items in white can be selected by gt Release the controller highlighting them gt The active field is brighter in color 2 Activating a menu item 5 Adjusting settings gt Press the controller gt Turn the controller gt New menu items are displayed or the gt Graphic display numerical value or text function is executed displays can be changed
194. ion pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km h A In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km h adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres sures listed on the following pages in the col umns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km h Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur 4 Observe all national and local maximum speed limits otherwise violations of the laws could occur Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Coupe tire inflation pressures for the 128i Tire size All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 195 55 R 16 87 HM S 205 55 R16 91 H M S 205 50 R17 89 H M S Front 205 50 R 17 89 V Rear 225 45 R17 91 V Front 215 40 R 18 85 Y Rear 245 35 R 18 88 Y More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239 Pressure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to a max of 100 mph 160 km h hihi Q 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 38 260 35 240 35 240 35 240 Coupe tire inflation pressures for the 135i Tire size All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 205 50 R17 89 H M S Front 215 40 R 18 85 Y Rear 245 35 R 18 88 Y Traveling speeds including those exceeding SLON 32 220 32 220 32 220
195. ion with Steptronic 60 manual transmission 60 Transporting children safely 55 Transport securing devices refer to Securing cargo 118 Tread depth refer to Minimum tire tread 209 Treble refer to Treble and bass 151 Treble tone control 151 Trip computer 70 Trip computer 70 Trip distance counter refer to Trip odometer 67 Triple turn signal 63 Triple turn signal activation 63 Trip odometer 67 Trunk refer to Cargo bay Trunk lid refer to Luggage compartment lid 33 257 Oo O O Gen 9 ad Everything from A Z Turn indicating triple turn signal 63 Turning circle refer to Dimensions 237 Turn signals 62 indicator lamp 12 replacing bulbs 225 Tying down loads refer to Cargo loading 118 U Underbody protection refer to Caring for your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQR 208 Units 71 Units of measure average fuel consumption 71 temperature 71 Universal garage door opener refer to Integrated universal remote control 103 Universal remote control 103 Unlatching refer to Unlocking 29 Unlock button 30 Unlocking from inside 33 from outside 29 luggage compartment lid 37 Without remote control refer to Convenient access 36 Unlocking without a key refer to Convenient access 36 Update services 194 196 USB audio interface 170 USB for audio mode 169 171 258 V Vehicle battery 227 breaking in 114
196. ions with other devices gt Is the mobile phone no longer responding Switch the mobile phone off and on or briefly disconnect the power supply To repeat pairing 1 Select Restart pairing and press the con troller Help Pairing was not successful Please start the pairing procedure again If the problem reoccurs your telephone may not be compatible 2 Repeat steps 9 to 14 If pairing fails again contact BMW Customer Relations To call BMW Customer Relations Select Help and press the controller Restart pairing Pairing was not successful Please start the pairing procedure again If the problem reoccurs your telephone may not be compatible The phone number for BMW Customer Rela tions and information necessary for pairing appear on the display In mobile phones that are already connected you can select the BMW Customer Relations phone number to place the call ZF Bluetooth Help m c E E e O For questions about your vehicle s Bluetooth system please contact Vehicle ID Phone preparation EE12345 1234567 List of paired mobile phones Mobile phones with pairing data stored by the vehicle can be displayed If several mobile phones are detected by the vehicle at the same 179 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG time the mobile phone at the top of the list can be operated via the vehicle You can change
197. ir vents must therefore be open Switching on off directly iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller to the left to open Cli mate 3 Select Parked car operation and press the controller 4 Select Automatic ventilation and press the controller 5 Select Parked car ventilation and press the controller efit Parked car operation i Automatic ventilation If the 32 symbol on the display of the automatic climate control is flashing parked car ventila tion is switched on Preselecting switch on times 1 Call up Climate 2 Select Parked car operation and press the controller 3 Select Activation time and press the con troller Two consecutive switch on times must be at least 31 minutes apart 4 4 Move the controller to the left or right to select Timer 1 or Timer 2 oti Parked car operation s Activation time O Timer 9 30am 9 45am 5 Select the time and press the controller The hours setting is selected etit Parked car operation Activation time Timer 2 5 45pm O Timer 101 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ha O E O O Turn the controller to set the hours 7 Press the controller to select the minutes setting 8 Turn the controller to set the minutes Activating switch on times Move the contr
198. ired explosives licenses Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation either of which could result in personal injury lt Warning notices and information about the air bags can also be found on the sun visors Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags An analysis of the impression in the front pas senger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied The front and side air bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly gt The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags deactivated or activated refer to Status of front passenger air bags below 4 Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat read the safety precau tions and handling instructions under Trans porting children safely refer to page 55 The front and side airbags can also be deacti 89 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG v i O Technology for driving comfort and safety vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer tain positions the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on In such cases the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
199. is Owner s Manual at time of printing 5 Steam jet 219 220 Steering wheel 53 adjustment 53 buttons on steering wheel 11 freely programmable buttons 53 Steering wheel buttons 53 Steering with variable ratio refer to Active steering 88 Steptronic refer to Automatic transmission with Steptronic 60 Stopwatch 79 Stopwatch 79 Storage 222 Storage compartment package 107 Storage compartments 107 Store for satellite radio 162 Store in address book in navigation 132 Store on the radio 156 Storing seat position refer to Seat and mirror memory 49 telephone numbers refer to separate Owner s Manual Storing current position 132 Storing radio stations 156 Storing tires 211 Stowage refer to Storage compartments 107 Street in destination entry 126 Summer tires refer to Wheels and tires 204 Surround Settings refer to Tone control 152 Switches refer to Cockpit 10 Switching off engine 59 Switching off the engine start stop button 58 Switching on audio 150 CD changer 150 CD player 150 radio 150 Switching on the hour signal 76 Switching the cooling function on and off 100 Switch on times of parked car ventilation preselecting 101 Symbols 4 navigation system 143 status information 20 traffic info for navigation system 141 F Tachometer 67 Tail lamp refer to Tail lamps 225 replacing bulb 226 Tail lamps
200. isplayed After driving a few minutes the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored The system reset is completed during your drive and can be inter Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG rupted at any time When driving resumes the reset is continued automatically On the Control Display the wheels are shown in green and Status TPM active is displayed again gt If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting and determining the inflation pressures all wheels on the Control Display are displayed in yellow The message Tire low is shown 4 Message for low tire inflation pressure 1 The warning lamps come on in yellow _ and red message appears on the Control Display In addition a signal sounds There is a flat tire or substan tial loss of tire pressure 1 Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph 80 km h Avoid sudden braking and steer ing maneuvers Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h If the car is not equipped with Run Flat Tires refer to page 210 the stan dard equipment by design do not continue driving Otherwise a severe accident could result after a tire puncture if you continue driving 4 2 Inthe event of complete pressure loss O psi 0 kPa you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines gt With a light load 1 to 2 persons without luggage
201. just pressure in all tires also after a tire change 2 Select Reset only while stopped with ignition on or engine running Reset Status active 6 Start the engine but do not start driving 7 Select Reset and press the controller 8 Select Yes and press the controller oe FIM Do you want to reset tire pressur No Reset active status 9 Start to drive Initialization is completed while the car is on the move without any feedback Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Indication of a flat tire 1 The warning lamps come on in yellow and red A message appears on the Control Display In addition a signal sounds There is a flat tire or substan tial loss of tire pressure 1 Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph 80 km h Avoid sudden braking and steer ing maneuvers Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h A If the car is not equipped with Run d Flat Tires refer to page 210 the stan dard equipment by design do not continue driving Asevere accident could result if you continue driving after a tire puncture 4 2 Atthe next opportunity check the air pres sure in all four tires gt If all four tires are inflated to the cor rect pressures the Flat Tire Monitor might not have been initialized The system must then be initialized lt 3 Inthe event of complete tire pressure loss O psi O kPa you can estimate the distance
202. l Your vehicle continuously stores service requirement information in the remote control while you are driving Your BMW Service Advi sor can read out this data from the remote con trol unit and propose an optimized mainte nance approach Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used Make sure that the date is always set cor rectly refer to page 76 otherwise the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured lt Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require ments gt BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your BMW center Take the time to ensure that these service pro cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi cle s Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci fied regular maintenance lt 4 gt z O 217 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Maintenance Socket for On Board services y Ll A Pi l F LA a a a Primary component
203. lamp flasher 94 Roadside parking lamps 94 Computer 68 Settings and information about the vehicle 71 Settings and information about the vehicle 71 Instrument lighting 95 9 Instrument cluster 12 10 KJ Windshield wipers 63 Rain sensor 63 11 SART Switching the ignition on off and ygn Starting stopping the engine 58 12 Ignition lock 58 v O S D i lt 13 Buttons on the steering wheel f Telephone gt Press accepting and ending a call starting dialing of selected phone number redi aling if no phone number is selected gt Press longer redialing Volume Activating deactivating voice com l mand system lt gt Changing radio station Selecting music track Scrolling through phone book and lists with stored phone numbers Individually programmable 53 Individually programmable 53 14 Horn the entire surface 15 Adjusting the steering wheel 53 A Cruise control 65 17 Releasing the hood 212 18 Opening the luggage compartment lid 33 11 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Instrument cluster Q xX O Q a A N wis wen Ts HAL l Pty i j F A 80 fe Speedometer 135i with fuel gauge Indicator lamps for turn signals Indicator and warning lamps 13 Tachometer 67 Fuel gauge 68 135i engine oil temperature 68 Display for gt Clock 67 gt Outside temperature 67 gt Indicator a
204. ler until HD radio is selected and press the controller Treble Bass Balance P i Select Off and press the controller J Digital station reception is now switched on H This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally i FM 4 Presets 1 1035 SK EE J s75 O C PEENI 157 T KROQ 8 100 5 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Some stations do not transmit the digital and analog signals simultaneously If you are in an area in which digital reception of the selected station is not possible continuously reception will alternate between analog and digital This can cause repetitions or interruptions In this case it may be preferable to switch off digital reception Some stations broadcast several programs ona single frequency To select one of these pro grams Select FM or AM and press the control ler SAT CD AUX Manual l 98 100 102704 106 108 100 15 Select Manual and press the controller BR 90 92 94 95 Select a station that can be received digi tally H This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally ED Change to the next program of the digital station using the buttons on the radio or steering wheel You can store a Station refer to page If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received you can update the list of stations received with the stronges
205. les BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles even if all tires have the same size as this could impair driving characteristics If the tires are of mixed sizes swapping wheels between the axles is not per missible Snow chains Only certain fine link snow chains have been tested by BMW classified as safe for use and recommended Consult your BMW center for more information Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only Observe the manufacturer s instructions when mounting snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h with chains gt Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted otherwise the instrument might issue an incorrect reading When driving with snow chains you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily refer to page 82 4 211 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Under the hood Under the hood Do not work on the car unless you pos EN sess the necessary technical knowledge If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel If this work is not carried out properly there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz ards 4 Hood Releasing SH Pull the lever Opening A To avoid damage
206. lf recorded CDs DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build up and can cause irreparable damage to the device Only use round CDs DVDs with a standard diameter of 4 7 in 12 cm and do not play CDs DVDs with an adapter e g Single CDs other wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no longer eject Do not use a combined CD DVD e g DVDPIUS otherwise the CD DVD can jam and will no longer eject lt General malfunctions BMW CD DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs DVDs than stationary devices would be Ifa CD DVD cannot be played first check if it has been inserted correctly Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD DVD or the laser s scan lens and temporarily prevent playback 168 Malfunctions with individual CDs DVDs If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs DVDs one of the following factors may be the cause Self recorded CDs DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self recorded CDs DVDs are e g inconsistent data creation or recording processes or poor quality or high age of the CD DVD blank Only label CDs DVDs on the top with a pen designed for this purpose Damage prevention Avoid leaving fingerprints as well as dust scratches or moisture on the CDs DVDs Keep CDs DVDs in protective sleeves or cases Do not subject
207. lision Avoid wearing bulky clothing and reg ularly pull the belt in the upper body area taut otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired 4 Safety belts refer to page 51 Seats Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving The seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an 45 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Adjustments accident On the front passenger seat as well do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven otherwise there is a dan ger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt eliminating the protection nor mally provided by the belt 4 Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 47 and on damaged safety belts on page 51 Manual adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per sonal protection lt Longitudinal direction Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position After releasing the lever move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages prop erly Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off as necessary 46 Backrest MAT Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back rest or lift it off as necessary Tilt A EN Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off as necessar
208. lt Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds gt When a door the hood or the luggage com partment lid is opened gt To movements inside the vehicle interior motion sensor refer to page 35 gt When the car s inclination changes for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away tilt alarm sensor refer to page 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG gt When there is an interruption in the power supply from the battery Depending on the national market version the alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry attempts by gt An acoustic alarm gt Switching on the hazard warning flashers Arming and disarming When you lock or unlock the vehicle either with the remote control or at the door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time You can open the luggage compartment lid using the EJ button of the remote control even if the alarm system is armed refer to page 30 The lid is locked and monitored again as soon as it is closed Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation Press the button for at least three seconds To switch off the alarm press any button Switching off an alarm gt Unlock the car with the remote control refer to page 29 or gt insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock Indicat
209. lure there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be raised The system must be initialized BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center Closing manually In the event of an electrical malfunction you can move the glass roof manually 1 Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit refer to page 223 40 2 On both sides use the screwdriver to press on the clip inside the opening 3 Remove the control unit 4 Unplug the motor Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation 5 Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the onboard tool kit refer to page 223 into the opening provided Move the glass roof in the desired direction 6 Reattach the lamp cover and reinstall the control unit Convertible top The fully automatic top combines reliable weather protection with simple and convenient operation Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your convertible gt Itis advisable that you close the convertible top when you park the vehicle Not only does the closed top protect the vehicle inte rior against unanticipated weather damage it also offers a certain amount of theft pro tection However even when the top is closed valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo bay gt Do not attach roof mounted luggage sys tems
210. ly press the rear edge 2 Turnthe gas cap counterclockwise 3 Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click Do not pinch the band attached to the cap otherwise the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape A mes sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or missing 4 Manually releasing the fuel filler door In the event of a malfunction you can release the fuel filler door manually 202 1 Remove the cover from the right hand side wall of the cargo bay 2 Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol down The fuel filler door is released Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage 4 When refueling insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank as that would lead to gt premature pump shutoff gt reduced efficiency of the fuel vapor recov ery system The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time Fuel tank capacity Approx 14 US gallons 53 liters including the reserve capacity of 2 1 US gallons 8 liters Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles 50 km otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occ
211. m ple you can store all the destinations you wish to drive to in the destination list in advance refer to Entering a destination manually on page 123 Select Navigation and press the controller iy Navigation New destination MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WY Route pre ference gt Ar roy d l D l Y j The destination last entered is listed first in the destination list me This symbol identifies the current destina tion during destination guidance To show other destinations in the destination list Turn the controller Transferring destination for destination guidance 1 Select the desired destination from the des tination list and press the controller 2 Select Start guidance and press the con troller L RK Navigation Add roadies book information on destination Delete entry Delete list AT row isp E ye Editing destination list 1 Select the desired destination from the des tination list and press the controller 2 Theselected destination can be edited gt To store the entry Select Add to address book gt To display information on the destina tion Select Information on destination gt To delete the entry Select Delete entry gt To delete all entries Select Delete list The destination guidance is switched off gt To change an entry Select Edit For operation refer to Entering destination by town city name page
212. m 122 Grills refer to Air vents 97 Gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 239 250 H Halogen lamps replacing bulbs 224 Handbrake refer to Parking brake 59 Hands free system refer to Microphone for hands free mode 14 Hazard warning flashers 14 HD radio 157 HD radio refer to High Definition Radio 157 Head airbags 89 Headlamp control automatic 92 Headlamp cover 224 Headlamp flasher 62 indicator lamp 13 Headlamps replacing bulbs 224 Head restraints 47 Heated seats 49 Heated mirrors 52 Heating mirrors 52 seats 49 Heating rear window 100 Heating and ventilation 97 Heating during a stop 100 Heavy loads refer to Stowing cargo 117 Height refer to Dimensions 237 Height adjustment steering wheel 53 High beams 94 indicator lamp 13 replacing bulbs 224 High Definition Radio 157 High pressure washer 219 220 High water refer to Driving through water 116 Highways refer to Route criteria 134 Hills 116 Holders for cups 107 Home address 133 Home address in navigation 134 Hood 212 Hot exhaust system 115 Hour memo 76 House number in destination entry 126 Hydraulic brake assist refer to Dynamic Brake Control 82 Hydroplaning 115 IBOC refer to High Definition Radio 157 Ice warning refer to Outside temperature warning 67 ID3 tag refer to Information about the track 165 Identification marks tire coding 208 iDri
213. make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the engine compartment Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down otherwise injuries may result lt Press the release handle and open the hood 212 Closing Close the hood from a height of approx 16 in 40 cm with momentum It must be clearly heard to engage A Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear otherwise injuries may result If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed stop at once and close it securely lt 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Important parts of the engine compartment 4 s T 1 Expansion tank for coolant refer to 3 Jump starting connection refer to page 216 page 230 2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean 4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil refer to Add ing system and window washer system ing engine oil page 215 refer to page 64 Engine oil Display in the instrument cluster The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions T 2 a es f a Checking oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic oil level monitor For a precise measurement and display of the oil level it is necessary that the engine be at operating temperature i e after uninterrupted driving for at least approx 6 5 miles 10 km You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving or
214. matically if the sound output is on When playing CDs with compressed audio files it can take the CD player approx 1 minute to read in the data depending on the directory structure To start playback when there is already a CD in the drive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to call up Entertainment 3 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Select CD and press the controller FM AM SAT Track 1 4 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the second field from the top On cars with a CD changer select CD and press the controller to start the CD player E cor ca cb1 CD2 CD3 CD4 gt 10 11 l 2 00 00 Playback starts automatically if the sound out put is switched on Via programmable memory keys You can store the CD player function on the programmable memory keys to start the CD player refer to page 21 Starting the CD changer Fill and insert the CD magazine refer to page 167 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to call up Entertainment 163 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG p T ad oon T p LL If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Select CD and press the controller If necessary move the highlight marker t
215. mory keys You can store the AUX function on the pro grammable memory keys to start audio play back refer to page 21 ed 3 fa ed S ed Lu 169 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG USB audio interface USB audio interface You can connect audio devices e g an iPod or a USB device MP3 player USB stick to the USB audio interface They can be operated via iDrive Standard audio formats e g MP3 WMA WAV PCM and AAC and playlists in the M3U format can be played Due the variety of audio devices on the market it cannot be guaranteed that every device will be operable on the vehicle Ask your BMW center about what audio devices are Suitable Connecting Lift up the center armrest 1 Connection for audio playback TRS connector 1 8 in 3 5 mm 2 USB interface gt Depending on your vehicle s equipment version it may contain a storage pouch for your audio device The pouch is located under the center armrest 4 iPod To connect the iPod use the BMW cable adapter for Apple iPod For more information contact your BMW center or go to the Internet www bmw com To play audio tracks over the vehicle s loud speaker system connect the iPod to ports 1 and 2 170 The iPod s menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface USB device To connect the device use the included flexible adapter cable to protect the USB interface and yo
216. move the snap in adapter Press area 1 Important for voice commands For voice commands bear in mind the follow ing gt Pronounce the commands smoothly and at normal volume avoiding excessive empha ses and pauses gt Keep the doors windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise gt Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while Inserting mobile phone speaking 1 If applicable remove the protective cap from the mobile phone s antenna connector n so that the mobile phone can engage in the Inserting removing snap in snap in adapter K adapter 2 With its buttons facing upward slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical con tact points and press it downward until it engages 1 Press area 1 around the button and take off the cover 2 Insert the snap in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages The mobile phone s battery is charged as soon as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer ing is unlocked gt To conserve battery power you should avoid using the mobile phone when the ignition is switched off 4 m c O ES E O O 189 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning Removing mobile phone Press the button 190 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG BMW Assist BMW Assist provides you with various services For example the position data
217. n after approx 20 seconds but are kept in memory They are marked with the symbol shown here Viewing stored Check Control messages miai F CHECK 1 Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the words CHECK 2 Press button 2 CHECK OK appears if there are no Check Control messages If a Check Control mes sage has been stored the corresponding lamp comes on It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display 78 3 Push button 1 to check for other messages 4 Press button 2 The display again shows the outside tem perature and the time Viewing more information later iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Info sources and press the control ler IE Settings Display ob lt gt T RL LIL LIL tb Travel Info F Service Info 4 Select Service Info and press the control ler 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Check Control messages is selected and press the controller Lighting system Stop vehicle E Washer fluid level low BA Engine oil level below minimum Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 6 Select a text message and press the con troller S Washe
218. n for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG m c O E E O O BMW Assist You can also access the BMW Assist Concierge service via the Internet Characteristics of the offered services The following characteristics apply to the ser vices gt The services offered are country specific gt Voice contact is established or data are transferred depending on the equipment and the country In some countries it is possible to do both gt The data transmitted can be vehicle data for example your current position or the Condition Based Service CBS data Using services Contacting the BMW Assist Response Center You can contact the BMW Assist Response Center via the SOS button 1 Briefly press the cover flap to open The arrangement of the switches and indi cator lamps varies slightly among vehicle equipment versions 2 Press the button for at least 2 seconds The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 192 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Communication we Climate Navigation Entertainment 2 Move the controller forwards to select Communication 3 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until BMW Assist is selected and press the controller Phone Service Request Start service REXF
219. n lead to component damage or water penetration Follow the operating instruc tions of the high pressure washer lt When using high pressure washers do Not spray against the sensors and cam eras e g of the Park Distance Control or Rear View Camera for an extended period and main tain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm lt Manual car wash When washing the vehicle by hand use large quantities of water and car shampoo if neces sary Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash ing brush applying light pressure only gt Before cleaning the windshield deacti _ vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni tion to prevent unintentional activation of the wipers 4 n Observe local regulations pertaining to X washing vehicles by hand lt Headlamps Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents Remove contamination such as insects by soaking with shampoo or insect remover and then rinsing with plenty of water Thaw ice with a windshield de icer and do not use an ice scraper Windows Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the windows and the mirrors with window cleaner D Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz Wiper blades Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to avoid streaking gt Wax and preservative residue and con tamination on the window can lead to streaking when operating the windshield wip ers leading to premature
220. n the car It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW It is stored with the onboard tool kit underneath the floor mat in the cargo bay refer to page 223 Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting e g do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting Otherwise the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged Access to screw thread Rectangular cover panel in bumper Press the arrow on the cover Front Rear in gt z O Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on refer to page 58 otherwise the low beam headlamps tail lamps turn signal indicators and 231 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG istance iving and receiving ass G windshield wipers may be unavailable Power steering assistance Is not available when the engine is not running Thus braking and steer ing will require increased effort Active steering is not active and it will be necessary to turn the steering wheel further 4 Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position Automatic transmission Selector lever in position N Changing the selector lever position refer to page 61 Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph 70 km h and a towing distance of 90 miles 150 km otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged lt Towing met
221. n tire age which can result in a limited service life 4 Correct wheels and tires When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa mount Run Flat Tires for your own safety In the event of a flat no spare wheel is available Your BMW center will be glad to advise you BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW has tested and approved for your particular vehicle Variations in factors such as manufac turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions which could lead to body contact and thus to severe acci dents If non approved wheels and tires are used BMW cannot evaluate their suitability and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety lt You can inquire about the right wheel tire com bination at your BMW center The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS DSC or FTM To maintain good handling and vehicle response use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration After a tire has been dam aged mount the previous wheel and tire combi nation again as soon as possible Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires or vice versa only use wheels with TPM electronics otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor m
222. nciple refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Steering wheel buttons and press the controller Navigation voice instructions Air recirculation on off Mute on off Telephone list Next entertainment source Display open close A list showing various functions is dis played gt Navigation voice instructions Voice messages from the navigation system gt Air recirculation on off To shut off the supply of outside air per manently refer to Automatic recircu 53 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG LL e L mur e O Adjustments lated air control AUC Recirculated air mode on page 99 gt Mute on off To mute the audio sources gt Telephone list To switch between any menu and tele phone gt Next entertainment source To change the audio source gt Display open close To open and close the screen 5 Select the desired function and press the controller oq Steering Wheel buttons lt gt L Diamond Bumaon voice Instructions on tion on ot Mute on off Telephone list Next entertainment source Display open close 6 Select a button if appropriate and press the controller You can operate the selected function using the corresponding button Operating a function Briefly press
223. nd convertible top operation With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond you can open and close the windows and the convertible top when a remote control is located inside the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately Press the button on the outside of the luggage compartment lid This corresponds to pressing the EJ button Tr If the vehicle detects that a remote con trol has been accidentally left inside the locked vehicle s interior after the luggage com partment lid is closed the lid will reopen The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal sounds 4 Switching on radio readiness Radio readiness Is switched on by pressing the start stop button refer to page 58 gt Do not depress the brake or the clutch otherwise the engine will start immedi ately 4 Starting the engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition switch refer to page 58 Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P refer to page 59 To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N the remote control must be in the ignition switch Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash 1 Insert remo
224. nd trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster When the engine is off please switch off _ the ignition and any unnecessary electri cal consumers in order to preserve the bat tery lt 4 Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis plays in the instrument cluster go out Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Starting the engine Do not run the engine in closed rooms EN otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust gases can cause unconsciousness and death The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running otherwise such a vehicle repre sents a potential safety hazard Before leaving the car with the engine running place the transmission in neutral or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from mov ing lt Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds Avoid frequent starting in quick succes sion as well as repeated start attempts in which the engine does not start Otherwise the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter 4 Manual transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or with con venient access inside the vehicle re
225. nd warning lamps 77 12 y as BRAE S 4 4 m 7 tak i 8 340 Z 20 Sr D LITRES 7 Display for gt Position of automatic transmission 60 gt Computer 68 gt Date of next scheduled service and remaining distance to be driven 72 gt Odometer and trip odometer 67 gt Checking oillevel 213 gt Settings and information 71 8 Resetting the trip odometer 67 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Indicator and warning lamps The concept Indicator and warning lamps in the display area can light up in a variety of combinations and col ors Some lamps are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on Explanatory text messages Climate Entertainment Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps ww Washer fluid insuficient washer fluid in fluid Refill as soon as possible refer to Owner s Manual F 103 5 inii 07 45 PM You can call up more information e g on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond via Check Control refer to page 77 In urgent cases this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active High beams hea
226. ndicator lamp in the instrument PY cluster comes on PDC is malfunc __tioning A message appears on the Control Display Have the system checked To avoid this problem keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively When using a high pressure cleaner do not direct the jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and only spray from a distance of at least 4 in 10 cm PDC with visual warning You can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display The contours of distant objects are shown on the Control Dis play even before the acoustic signal sounds The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller aq Audio J Display settings Steering wheel buttons YS Vehicle Tires Language Units AS Time Date 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller 81 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Display olp lt gt LL e tea mur e O Technology for driving comfort and safety until PDC is selected and press the con troller a FT F EY PDC display on 6 Select P
227. nding to your current location The compass is operational again after approx 10 seconds 105 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ir e tea mur e O ior accessories Practical inter Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations gt An incorrect compass direction is shown gt The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does gt Not all compass directions are shown Procedure 1 Make sure that no large metal objects or overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle Set the currently valid compass zone Press the adjustment button for approx 6 7 seconds to call up C Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph or 7 km h If calibration is successful the display changes from C to a compass direction Setting right hand left hand steering Your digital compass is factory set to right hand or left hand steering in accordance with your vehicle Setting the language You can set the language of the display Press the adjustment button for approx 12 13 seconds Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English E and German O The setting is automatically saved after approx 10 seconds 106 Glove compartment Opening ae j Pull the handle The li
228. ne Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Store and press the controller FM i Presets Turn the controller until the desired mem ory location is selected The number of the memory location appears beside the name or frequency of the station Press the controller The station is stored On the FM waveband additional information is broadcast via RDS If the reception conditions are good the station names are shown on the Control Display Where reception is poor or in the event of interference it may take some time before the station names will appear in the dis play Select FM and press the controller Set is selected Press the controller Other menu items are displayed Select RDS and press the controller T EM i Presets Store Tone Scan A RDS is activated The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Many stations transmit analog and digital sig nals You can receive these stations digitally for improved sound quality A digital radio network must be available to be able to receive digital stations iDrive for operating principle refer to page Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Select Audio and press the controller Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the control
229. ne can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle s battery You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running or a fatal acci dent may occur Carefully adhere to the follow 230 ing sequence both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles and to guard against possible personal injuries 4 Preparation 1 Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah This information can be found on the bat tery 2 Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle 3 Switch off any consumers in both vehicles There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles otherwise there is a danger of shorting 4 Connecting jumper cables Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent sparking at the battery which could cause injury lt Your BMW has a jump starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the bat tery s positive terminal refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 213 The cap is marked with 1 Pull the cap of the BMW jump starting con nection up to remove re 2 Attach one terminal clamp of the plus jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting aid terminal of the vehi cle providing assistance 3 Attach
230. necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller 93 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Lamps until Lighting is selected and press the controller et Door locks no Triple tum signal Daytime running lamps 240 Pathway lighting O Welcome light 6 Select Daytime running lamps and press the controller EL The daytime running lamps are switched on The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Adaptive Head Light The concept Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface Depending on the steering angle and other parameters the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph 70 km h e g on mountainous roads or when turning an additional corner illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside area of the curve Activating Adaptive Head Light With the ignition switched on turn the light switch to position 3 refer to page 92 The corner illuminating lamp is switched on automatically depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator To avoid blinding oncoming traffic the Adaptive Head Light directs light towards the front pas senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill When you are reversing only the corner illumi nating lamps are active and switched on on both sid
231. ngle artist 1 Select the current track and press the con troller 2 Select Random and press the controller Stop random play 1 Press the controller 2 Select Random and press the controller Fast forward reverse Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction Notes FN Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions e g very high temperatures refer to the operating instructions of the audio device Otherwise the 172 audio device may become damaged which could compromise safety while driving 4 Depending on the configuration of the audio files e g bit rates greater than 256 KBit s the files may not play back correctly in every case Notes on connecting gt The USB audio interface acts as the power supply to the connected audio devices pro vided that this is supported by the audio device Therefore do not connect the USB audio device to the power socket in the vehicle during operation gt Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface gt Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface gt Do not connect USB hard disks gt Do not use the USB audio interface to charge external devices Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 ely 01 U04 sdi Bulang uoljeBiaAenN JUBWUIeVa UQ SuONeDIUNWIWOD AIO Pre 173 Online Edition for Part no 0
232. nition refer to page 58 delete the stored programs beforehand for your 5 When starting operation for the first time safety refer to page 104 ne press the left and right memory buttons 1 A To prevent possible damage or injury for approx 20 seconds until the LED 2 before programming or using the inte flashes rapidly The three memory buttons grated universal remote control always inspect are cleared the immediate area to make certain that no peo 3 ple animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated Com ply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand held transmitter 4 Hold the original hand held transmitter at a distance of approx 4 to 12 in 10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1 m The required distance between the hand held transmitter and the mem Checking compatibility ory buttons 1 depends onthe system of the ee bo Don idee respective original hand held transmitter or in the instructions supplied with the ee original hand held transmitter you can 4 Simultaneously press the transmit key on assume that the radio remote control device will the original hand held transmitter and the be compatible with the integrated universal desired memory button 1 on the integrated remote control universal remote control The LED 2 flashes slowly at first As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly release both buttons If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after a
233. not secure cargo with the anchors for tether straps refer to page 56 otherwise these could be damaged 4 Coupe roof mounted luggage rack A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions Mounting points M Fold open the cover Loading roof mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle s center of gravity when loaded they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 239 The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom Be sure Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG that adequate clearance is maintained for rais ing the glass roof and that objects do not project into the opening path of the luggage compartment lid Fasten roof mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip Drive smoothly Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers Take corners gently Rear mounted luggage rack A rear mounted luggage rack is available as a special accessory for your BMW Comply with the directions given in the installation instruc tions
234. ns such as high ambient temperature and high altitude Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance 4 203 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Wheels and tires Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressures Information for your safety It is not merely the tires service life but also driving comfort and to a great extent driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres sure Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it if necessary atleast twice a month and before starting long trips If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures a condi tion that can not only compromise your vehi cle s driving stability but also lead to tire dam age and the risk of an accident Do not drive with deflated i e flat tires except when using Run Flat Tires A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle s handling and braking response Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle 4 Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tir
235. nsmission 61 Manual transmission 60 Map changing scale 139 destination entry 128 Map direction of travel 138 Map facing north 138 Maximum cooling 98 Maximum speed for winter tires 211 Menus refer to iDrive 16 Message list traffic information 142 252 Microfilter activated charcoal filter for automatic climate control 101 Microphone for telephone 14 Mirror dimming feature 53 Mirrors 51 automatic curb monitor 52 exterior mirrors 51 heating 52 interior rearview mirror 52 Missed calls 184 Missed calls 184 Mobile phone accepted calls 184 adjusting volume 181 calling 183 ending call 183 missed calls 184 operation via iDrive 181 redialing 184 Top 8 184 touch tone dialing 186 Mobile phone installation location refer to Center armrest 107 Mobile phone refer to the separate Owner s Manual Modifications technical refer to For your own safety 5 Monitor refer to iDrive 16 Monitoring system for tire pressures refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 Monitor on off 54 Most recent mobile phone numbers 184 MP3 refer to Compressed audio files 163 Multifunctional steering wheel refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11 Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals headlamp flasher 62 refer to Wiper system 63 Music tracks refer to Tracks 164 Mute on off 54 N Navigation 123 129 Navigation announcem
236. nt FM or gt AM FM menut gt AM menut gt FM All stations Station e g Station WNYC lt or Choose station FM presets or AM presets FM manual or AM manual or Choose frequency Frequency Megahertz 241 Oo O O Gen 9 ad Short commands for the voice command system Function To select preset radio station 156 To open strongest radio stations 155 To open SAT 161 To switch on satellite radio 161 To open Presets of the satellite radio 162 To open All channels of the satellite radio 161 To open Categories of the satellite radio 161 To open CD player 163 To switch on CD player 163 To open CD changer 163 To switch on CD changer 163 To select a CD in the CD changer 163 To select track 164 To select a CD and track in the CD changer 164 To select track 164 To start sound output for external audio device 169 Climate Function To open Vent settings 98 To open Automatic programs 99 imenu Function To open the menu To open Info sources To open Settings To open Door locks 29 32 To open Steering wheel buttons 53 To open Lighting 63 93 To open BMW Service 192 To open Service requirements 73 To open Service 72 To display Check Control messages 78 To set brightness of Control Display 80 242 Command Preset 4 e g Preset 1 lt AM Autostoret SAT radio menus SAT radio lt SAT radio pr
237. ntries os 2 BEVERLY HILLS CALIFORNIA 3 BEVERLY HILLS FLORIDA 4 BEVERLY HILLS MICHIGAN 5 BEVERLY HILLS MISSOURI 6 BEVERLY HILLS TEXAS we The system suggests a location 3 Select location gt To select highlighted town city Yes To select other town city Not To select an entry e g Entry 3 To re enter the town city Repeat YNY Yyy To enter the town city by spelling Spell The town city can also be selected from the list via iDrive Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller Identical sounding towns cities that can D not be distinguished by the system are compiled in a separate list and shown as a des tination followed by three dots If applicable select this entry with Yest Then select the desired town city from that list lt Entering street and house number The street is entered in the same way as the destination town city wt House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered Say the house number as individual digits To enter the house number 1 House number 2 Say the house number Starting destination guidance wt Start guidance Destination guidance starts immediately Storing destinations Destinations are added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book we Add to destination liste or Add to address book Map guided destination selection If you only know the location of the town
238. o the second field from the top Select the desired CD and press the controller im CD at CD2 D3 CD4 P At the end of the last track the next CD is selected and played If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga zine playback starts with the lowest CD e g CD 1 track 1 The CD magazine s load status is indicated on the Control Display You can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory keys to start the CD changer refer to page d tm Press the button for the appropriate d co as often as necessary until the desired track is reached The track is displayed on the Control Display You can also change the track with the buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 164 Turn the controller to select a track Select a directory if necessary and press the controller directory 2 directory 3 1001 Track 1 Select a track and press the controller E Root directory 4 002 Track 2 To change the directory Select the directory and press the controller 01 directory 4 001 Track 1 002 Track 2 003 Track 004 Track 4 005 Track Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG To exit from the menu Select Scan and press the controller Select the 4 3 arrow and press the controller If the car is equipped with two CD drives you can save specific tracks on the programmable memory keys refer to page 21 With compressed
239. o these grades Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use how ever and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteris tics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur faces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cor nering hydroplaning or peak traction charac teristics 4 Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
240. oa length of 6 6 ft 2 0 m When skis of 6 6 ft 2 0 m length are loaded the overall capacity of the ski bag Is reduced due to its tapered design When using the transport bag it is not permissible to transport passengers in the rear seats 4 Loading 1 Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear backrest up and take out the filler piece 2 Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion with the backrest side facing up Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Securing cargo Me e ho ed e O 3 Inthe cargo bay press the two recesses together and fold down the cover After loading secure the transport bag and its contents Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose Secure the transport bag in the manner described otherwise it could endanger the car s occupants e g in case of heavy brak Ing or sudden swerving lt To store the transport bag perform the steps described for loading in reverse order 4 Release the strap lay out the transport bag between the front seats and load it The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach Ensure that the skis are clean when you load them into the transport bag Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage 111 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Driving tips This section provides you wi
241. of an accident Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx ear level Oth erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone on that seat Otherwise 47 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Adjustments the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint lt Front seats Height adjustment gt To raise pull up gt To lower press the button arrow 1 and slide the head restraint down Removing 1 Pull it up as far as it will go 2 Press the button arrow 1 and pull the head restraint all the way out Rear seats Coupe height adjustment gt To raise pull up gt To lower press the button arrow 1 and slide the head restraint down Convertible raising and lowering D Only lower the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear Raise all low ered head restraints before transporting pas sengers in the rear lt 48 gt To raise pull up gt To lower press the button arrow 1 and slide the head restraint down arrow 2 Removing 1 Pull it up as far as it will go 2 Press the button arrow 1 and pull the head restraint all the way out Coupe folding head restraint down and up Depending on your vehicle s equipment it may con
242. okers package refer to Ashtray 107 108 Snap in adapter 189 Snap in adapter refer to Center armrest 107 255 Oo O O Gen 3 ad Everything from A Z Snow chains 211 Socket refer to Connecting electrical appliances 108 Socket for On Board Diagnosis OBD 218 Song search refer to Playing a track 165 Sound adjusting during audio playback refer to Tone control 151 Sound output for entertainment on off 150 Spare fuses 227 Speaking refer to Voice instructions from navigation system 140 Special oils refer to Specified engine oils 215 Specified engine oils 215 Speed for winter tires 211 Speed dependent volume control 151 Speed display refer to Speedometer 12 Speed limit 79 Speed limit warning refer to Speed limit 79 Speedometer 12 Speed volume refer to Tone control 152 Sport program automatic transmission with Steptronic 61 Spray nozzles refer to Windshield washer nozzles 64 Stability control refer to Driving stability control systems 82 Start stop button 58 starting the engine 59 switching off the engine 59 Start guidance 126 Starting refer to Starting the engine 59 Starting assistance refer to Jump starting 230 256 Starting the engine start stop button 58 Start menu 17 Start service 192 Start service for BMW Assist 195 State Province in destination entry 124 Station refer to Radio 154 Status 73 Status of th
243. oller to the left or right to select Timer 1 or Timer 2 and press the controller etin Parked car operation Activation time O Timer 1 9 30am 5 45 pm x7 The switch on time Is activated 3 The symbol on the automatic climate control display lights up 3 The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on The parked car ventilation system is D switched on within the next 24 hours only After that the time setting must be reacti vated lt 4 102 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Practical interior accessories Integ rated universal remote Home ink is a registered trademark of Johnson control Controls Inc The concept Programming The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand held transmit ters for various remote controlled devices such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys tems The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original v i O hand held transmitters LT The signal of an original hand held transmitter D 4 can be programmed on one of the three mem ory buttons 1 After this the programmed 1 Memory buttons memory button 1 will operate the system in 2 LED question The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans mission of the signal Fixed code hand held transmitters Should you sell your vehicle one day be sureto 1 Switch on the ig
244. on Dr Tom Julia Office 2 Select A Z and press the controller 3 To limit the number of displayed entries select the initial letter of the desired entry and press the controller 184 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Phone and press the controller Select a list and press the controller Top 8 Redial Missed calls Received calls Phone Bo Dial i A Da J On AST Wid Adam Dr Tom Julia Office Select the desired entry and press the con troller Fi Phone ops Select Call and press the controller The system dials the number Select the desired entry from the list and press the controller Select Delete and press the controller The entry is deleted i Phone Tops t Call Delete all numbers reter Adam Select an entry from the list and press the controller Select Delete all numbers and press the controller i F Phone gt 1 Tops En Call Delete Meter Adam If applicable select Yes and press the controller The list is deleted If BMW Assist has not been enabled for you you can have several service numbers dis played BMW Roadside Assistance if you need help in the event of a breakdown BMW Service if you wish to schedule a ser vice appointment for example BMW Customer Relations for information related to your vehicle If BMW Assist is enabled refer
245. on Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated Stabilizing and drive output promoting actions are no longer executed In the same way as with a differential interlock even if DSC is deactivated brake actions are still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive output if the drive wheels experience a signifi cant loss of traction To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible Activating DSC Press the button again the indicator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster go out For better control eas If the indicator lamp flashes A DSC is regulating the drive and braking forces N If the indicator lamps are on DSC is deactivated Dynamic Traction Control DTC DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out put is optimized for particular road conditions e g unplowed snow covered roads The sys tem assures the maximal drive output but with reduced driving stability It is therefore neces sary to drive with appropriate caution You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances gt When driving uphill on snow covered roads in slush or on unplowed snow covered roads gt When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start ing off in deep snow or on loose ground gt When driving with snow chains Activating DTC ha ES O Press the button the indicator lamps for DTC in the instrument cluster com
246. on for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Adjustments Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con tribution to relaxed fatigue free driving In con junction with the safety belts the head restraints and the airbags the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident To ensure that the safety sys tems operate with optimal efficiency we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section For additional information on transporting chil dren safely refer to page 55 Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags Always grip the steering wheel on the rim with your hands in the 3 o clock and 9 o clock positions to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off No one and nothing is to come between the air bags and the seat occupant Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly i e not resting feet or legs on the dashboard otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front air bag Is triggered Make sure that passengers do not lean their heads against the side or head airbag other wise serious injuries could result if the airbags suddenly deployed lt Even if you follow all the instructions injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully ex
247. on pressure gt The system must be reinitialized each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor rected or a wheel or tire has been changed 4 System limitations The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden severe tire damage caused by external factors nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time lt In the following situations the system could be delayed or malfunction gt System has not been initialized gt Driving on snowy or slippery road surface gt Performance oriented style of driving slip in the drive wheels high lateral acceleration gt Snow chains are attached Initializing the system The initialization is completed during driv Ing which can be interrupted at any time When driving resumes the initialization is con tinued automatically Do not initialize the system while snow chains are attached lt 84 iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Communication we Climate Navigation Entertainment 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until F TM is selected and press the con troller PDC Delete di b 1 Correctly ad
248. on the planned route is shown first sorted by distance from the vehi cle s current position Open the start menu Move the controller to the right to call up Navigation Select Traffic Info and press the control ler di book Information US 9 SOUTHBOUND US 9 NORTHBOUND Traffic information on the planned route is shown first sorted by distance from the vehi cle s current position Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Displaying traffic information in map display The traffic information icons are shown in the map display up to a scale of 100 miles 200 km The highlighting of the stretch corresponding to the traffic report and the icons for the type of event as described below are displayed and hidden This depends on the selected scale Displaying detailed traffic information Select a traffic information item from the list and press the controller between 95 Exit 10 and US 1 Exit 8 2 q in 3 8 mis delay 35min stopped traffic To exit from the menu Select the 4 arrow and press the controller Traffic information icons Traffic event displayed with map scales larger than 5 miles 10 km arrow points in relevant direction of travel There are several traffic events Switch to a smaller map scale to show more detail General traffic obstruction Transport of hazardous load Vehicle on wrong carriageway d Danger Low clearance a No parkin
249. onization When programming hand held transmitters that employ an alternating code please observe the following supplementary instructions gt Programming will be easier with the aid of _ a second person 4 1 Park your vehicle within the range of the remote controlled device 2 Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed code hand held transmitters 3 Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set e g on the drive unit 4 Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set After step 4 you have approx 30 seconds for step 5 5 Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times 104 The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand held transmitter gt If you have any questions please contact your BMW center lt Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap idly all stored programs are deleted Reassigning individual programs 1 Hold the original hand held transmitter at a distance of approx 4 to 12 in 10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1 m The required distance between the hand held transmitter and the mem ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand held transmitter used 4 2 Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote
250. ontroller To exit from the menu Select 45 and press the controller mn No service is currently required A The deadline for service or a legally man dated inspection is approaching Please schedule a service appointment A The service deadline has already passed Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly refer to page 76 otherwise the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not ensured iDrive for operating principle refer to page 74 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Info sources and press the control ler Select Service Info and press the control ler If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Service requirements is selected and press the controller Select Status and press the controller Select State inspection and press the controller ae Service requirements 4 Status 10 2009 A Rear brake pads al Vehicle check 5 Be o Brake fluid Front tirade pad Y Select Set service date and press the controller The month is highlighted Turn the controller to make the adjustment E es 12009 State inspection Next state safety inspection Press the controller to apply the setting The year is highlighted Turn the controller to make the adjustment Press the controller to apply the
251. oo F2 Contents AtoZ The Ultimate Driving Machine Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 1281 Owner s Manual for Vehicle 135i Congratulations and thank you for choosing a BMW Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it We therefore have this request Please take the time to read this Owner s Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW s unique range of technical fea tures The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models We wish you an enjoyable driving experience BMW AG BMW recommends Castrol Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 2008 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich Germany Reprinting including excerpts only with the written consent of BMW AG Munich Order No 01 41 0 014 954 US English 11 08 08 03 500 Printed in Germany Printed on
252. opyright 2 Corner illuminating lamps 94 Corner illuminating lamps refer to Adaptive Head Light 94 Cornering lamps refer to Adaptive Head Light 94 Courtesy lamps 95 Cross hairs in navigation 128 Cruise control 65 Cruising range 69 Cup holders 107 Curb weight refer to Weights 239 Current fuel consumption 69 Current position 144 Current position displaying 144 entering 132 storing 132 Customer Relations 186 194 D Dashboard refer to Cockpit 10 Dashboard lighting refer to Instrument lighting 95 Data dimensions 237 sizes 237 Data technical 236 capacities 239 engine 236 weights 239 Date 76 Date setting 76 setting format 77 Date format 77 Daytime running lamps 94 Daytime running lamps switch positions 93 DBC Dynamic Brake Control 82 Deactivated 51 Deactivating front passenger airbags 89 Deadlocking refer to Locking 30 Decommissioning the vehicle refer to Caring for your vehicle Defect door lock 32 fuel filler door 202 glass roof 40 luggage compartment lid 33 Defogging windows 100 Defrosting the windows 100 Defrosting windshield refer to Defrosting windows 100 Defrost position refer to Defrosting windows 100 247 Oo O O Gen 9 ad Everything from A Z Delete address book in navigation 133 Delete all numbers on the mobile phone 185 Delete data in navigation 1
253. or central locking refer to page 32 In the event of a sufficiently severe accident the central locking system unlocks automatically In addition the hazard warning flashers and inte rior lamps come on Opening and closing Using the remote control Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside You should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside 4 Unlocking Press the j button The interior lamps the courtesy lamps and the welcome lamps come on Setting unlocking characteristics You can set whether only the driver s door or the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 29 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller 4 PDC Lighting Central locking Unlock button All doors Last seal pos After door opened O Relock door if not opened O Lock after driving 6 Select Central locking and press the con troller 7 Sel
254. or lamp displays F gt The indicator lamp under the inside rear view mirror flashes continuously the sys tem is armed gt The indicator lamp flashes after locking doors hood or luggage compartment lid are not properly closed Even if you do not close the alerted area the system begins to monitor the remaining areas and the indi cator lamp flashes continuously after approx 10 seconds The interior motion sensor and the tilt alarm sensor are not acti vated gt The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away gt If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition but for no longer than approx 5 minutes your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored The alarm system reacts e g to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle Interior motion sensor Coupe In order for the interior motion sensor to func tion properly the windows and glass roof must be completely closed Convertible The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions Thus the alarm sys tem is activated together with the interior motion sensor even if the convertible top is open The alarm can be triggered unintention ally by falling objects such as leaves refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt
255. owed by the gear actually in use Shifting gears via shift paddles on the steering wheel The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel gt When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode the transmission switches to manual mode gt If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time the transmission switches back to automatic mode gt If the selector lever is in the M S gear _ plane manual mode remains active lt D i lt bN T ro m e E ie A P lt gt To shift up pull one of the shift paddles gt To shift down press one of the shift pad dles Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed thus for example a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru ment cluster followed by the gear actually in use 62 Overriding selector lever lock Should the selector lever refuse to move out of position P although the button on the selector lever is pressed the selector lever lock can be overridden 1 Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever 2 Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out mk F 3 Using the screwdri
256. pprox 15 sec onds alter the distance and repeat this step For additional information please contact your BMW center or call 1 800 355 3515 You can also obtain information on the Internet at www bmwusa com or www homelink com 5 To program other original hand held trans mitters repeat steps 3 and 4 103 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand held transmitter You can operate the device while the ignition is switched off gt If the device fails to function even after repeated programming check whether the original hand held transmitter uses an alter nating code system To do so either read the instructions for the original hand held transmit ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for about two seconds the original hand held transmitter uses an alternating code system If it uses an alternating code system program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating code hand held transmitters lt 4 Alternating code hand held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control consult the operating instructions for the device to be set You will find information there on the possibilities for synchr
257. pward Before opening the convertible top pull the cargo bay partition down until it engages Ensure that pointed objects do not press against the cargo bay partition from below gt The convertible top can only be opened when the cargo bay partition is folded down lt Storage compartments inside the cargo bay Depending on your vehicle s equipment the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay gt Rubber strap on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella gt Net for small objects on the right trim panel of the cargo bay gt Retaining straps on cargo bay floor for securing smaller objects or as an anti slip surface when you place objects on the straps The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo bay nets or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage refer to page 118 ir e tea mur e O Coupe ski bag The ski bag is designed for safe clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 6 ft 2 0 m When skis of 6 6 ft 2 0 m length are loaded the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design Loading Ensure that the skis are clean when they are loaded into the ski bag Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage 1 Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest 2 Press the button reach into
258. r fluid insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir Refill as soon as possible refer to Owner s Manual To exit the display Select 4 3 and press the controller Speed limit You can enter a speed and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed This enables you for example to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph 5 km h iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Callup Navigation 3 Select Car Data and press the controller 4 Select Limit and press the controller Gi Car Data T l Stopwatch 4 Trip computer Change limit 50 mph Select current speed O On Setting or changing the limit 1 Select the speed and press the controller 2 Turn the controller to set the limit 3 Press the controller to apply the setting Stopwatch Applying your current speed as limit Select Select current speed and press the controller The system adopts your current speed as the limit Activating the limit Select On and press the controller Q Limit is activated 2 e ho ed e O iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Callup Navigation 3 Select Car Data and press t
259. r is equipped with two drives and a CD with compressed audio files is played the current track is stored lt Executing a function aw Press the key The function is executed immediately This means that for example if a phone number is selected the connection is established or if a navigation destination is called up destination guidance is started Displaying memory key assignments You can have the assignment of a memory key displayed by touching the key with your finger Please do not wear gloves when doing so Touching the keys with an object such as a pen will not work Displaying brief information am Touch the key The key assignment is displayed Communication Climate Entertainment J J Hitradio Navigation destination J Entertainment source Telephone phone number Not assigned 22 Displaying detailed information Ge ER Touch the key for a longer period Clearing key assignments 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Select Programmable Memory Keys and press the controller Dele b i gt Delete assignment of all memory keys 6 Select Delete assignment of all memory keys and press the controller 7 Select Yes and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954
260. r lamp The indicator lamp is lit and when you ake drive off a signal sounds in addition The parking brake is still applied 59 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG iving Dr O Indicator lamp for Canadian models oe od Applying The lever locks in position automatically Releasing amr Pull slightly upwards press the button and lower the lever In exceptional cases if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car do not pull the lever up too hard In doing so con tinuously press the button of the parking brake lever Otherwise excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve lt 4 To prevent corrosion and one sided brak gt ing action occasionally apply the parking brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable The brake lamps do not light up when the park ing brake is applied 4 60 Manual transmission a EN SEE 9 4 6 When shifting into 5th or 6th gear press the gearshift lever to the right Otherwise the engine could be damaged if you inadvert ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear 4 Reverse gear Select this only when the vehicle is stationary When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left a slight resistance has to be overcome Automatic transmission with Steptronic In addition to fully automatic operation you can also manuall
261. recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road Enter the number of miles kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top Turn the controller until New route is selected and press the controller Navigation New destination te SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA Mibute list Route preference Arrow display 3 Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller The route is recalculated To exit from the menu without changing the route Select the 44 arrow and press the controller Traffic information In many metropolitan areas you can receive traffic information broadcast by radio stations The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic control centers and the traffic information is updated periodically During destination guidance the traffic infor mation relevant to the route you are planning to take is automatically shown and if desired taken into account in route planning Whether destination guidance is active or not you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic info list Switching reception of traffic information on off iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu O gt 2 Pre
262. red in the Top 8 list A D J 0 RST W 2Z gt Redial TERE The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored The last Dr Tom number dialed is at the top of the list lulla Office gt Missed calls The phone numbers of the last eight 5 Select Call and press the controller rejected calls are stored This requires the The system dials the number telephone number of the caller to have been If different phone numbers are stored in the transmitted mobile phone under one name e g office and gt Received calls home the name is shown once for each phone The phone numbers of the last eight number accepted calls are stored This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted You can change a phone number stored in the phone book e g to call a specific extension 1 Select Phone and press the controller Selecting phone numbers from phone 2 Select A Z and press the controller book 3 Select the desired entry and press the con The A Z list is available for your phone book troller entries The phone book entries appear on the Select Add digits and press the controller Control Display 5 Change the phone number 1 Select Phone and press the controller 6 Select Dial number and press the control BMW Assist a Cer A k Dialing a stored phone number from a D J 0 RST W Z list Adam To select an entry and establish a connecti
263. rom the top Choose a selection criterion and press the controller FMI _ Allstations 7 KROQ 8 100 5 The stations on the current waveband are auto matically sampled in succession Select FM or AM and press the control ler Set is selected Press the controller Other menu items are displayed Select Scan and press the controller ii E 7 i i Presets Tane cal v 4 7 KROQ 1S 100 5 The stations are sampled Stop sampling Press the controller Select Scan and press the controller Station sampling is interrupted and the selected station stays on To sample stations press the but ton foi the corresponding direction for an extended time To stop scanning press the button again With Manual you can select stations that can be received in addition to those displayed Select FM or AM and press the control ler Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top Select Manual and press the controller E FM All stations Presets Turn the controller to set a certain fre quency If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals in the AM waveband Select AM and press the controller Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top Select Autostore and press the controller Set is selected 1 1690
264. rsection 125 Entering a street 125 Entertainment 150 Equalizer refer to Tone control 152 Equalizer refer to Tone control 152 ESN 160 ESP Electronic Stability Program refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82 Event data recorders 218 Exhaust system refer to Hot exhaust system 115 Exterior mirrors 51 adjusting 51 automatic dimming feature 53 automatic heating 52 folding in and out 52 External audio device refer to AUX In port 169 Eyes for tow starting and towing away 231 for tying down loads 118 F Fader tone control 151 Failure messages refer to Check Control 77 Failure of an electrical consumer 227 False alarm refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms 35 Fastening safety belts refer to Safety belts 51 Fastest route for navigation 134 Fast forward CD changer 167 CD player 167 Fast route in navigation 134 Filter of automatic climate control refer to Microfilter activated charcoal filter 101 First aid pouch 230 Fixture for remote control refer to Ignition lock 58 Flash when locking unlocking 31 Flat tire Run Flat Tires 210 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84 indicating a flat tire 85 initializing the system 84 malfunction 85 system limits 84 Flat tires refer to Tire condition 209 FM waveband 150 154 FM waveband 154 Fog lamps 95 indicator lamp 13 95 Footbrake refer to Br
265. s 3 Automatic headlamp control daytime run ning lamps welcome lamps Adaptive Head Light When you open the driver s door with the igni tion switched off the exterior lighting is auto matically switched off if the light switch is in position 0 2 or 3 Switch on the parking lamps if necessary switch position 1 Parking lamps In switch position 1 the front rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on You can use the parking lamps for parking The parking lamps will discharge the bat tery Therefore do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time otherwise the bat tery might not have enough power to start the engine It is preferable to switch on the left hand or right hand roadside parking lamps refer to page 94 4 Low beam headlamps The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on 92 Automatic headlamp control When the switch is in position 3 the low beams are switched on and off automatically depend ing on ambient light conditions e g in a tunnel in twilight or if there is precipitation The Adap tive Head Light is active The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on You can also activate the daytime running lamps refer to page 93 In the situations described above the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lamps to low beams The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky
266. s and other road users lt 4 gt z O 209 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Wheels and tires Tire age For various reasons such as the development of brittleness BMW recommends tire replace ment after no more than 6 years regardless of the actual wear of the tires The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding DOT 0708 means that the tire was manufac tured in week 7 of 2008 Run Flat Tires The symbol identifying Run Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall Run Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self supporting tire and a special rim The reinforce ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restric tions even if depressurized For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85 New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel If this work is not carried out properly there is a dan ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards Make sure that the new wheels are bal anced 4 Retreaded tires FN BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires since driving safety may 210 be impaired The causes for this include poten tially different tire casing structures and often wide variations i
267. s of your choice you must have the corresponding pack ages enabled With this new technology signal losses can occur from time to time and result in audio interruptions 4 Enabling or disabling channels iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to call up Entertainment 3 Select SAT t Presets SKUs Daa TDH f f Fi S HS ch 3 VN YE 4943 4 Press the controller Ca SAT All channels CH 001 Channel A 8 100 5 r CH 003 Channel C CH 004 Channel D CH 005 Channel E The channels are displayed x These channels are enabled Enabling 1 Select a channel that has not yet been enabled and press the controller A telephone number and the electronic serial number ESN are displayed Dl The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling 4 2 To enable the channel Dial the phone number Disabling 1 Select an enabled channel and press the controller sS t Jazz of OO Channel A Details hannel B nannel C hannel D CA channel E Store Tone 2 Select ESN and press the controller The electronic serial number ESN is dis played The electronic serial number is required for disabling 4 3 To disable the channel Dial the phone number 160 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG If Categories has be
268. s that make up exhaust emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket This socket is located on the driver s side to the left on the bottom of the instrument panel underneath a cover Exhaust emission values service The warning lamp lights up a The exhaust emission values have worsened Have the car checked as soon as possible Canadian models display this warning lamp The lamp flashes under certain conditions This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine If this happens you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions related components especially the catalytic converter ia The warninglamp comes on ifthe gas _ cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor is escaping If the gas cap is then tightened the warning lamp should go out within a few days Event data recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a device for recording or sending certain vehicle data or information In addition if you have 218 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG signed a service contract for BMW Assist cer tain vehicle data may be transmitted or Diagnosis OBD recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding Care Care products Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi cantly to the v
269. se contact your BMW center to have the cause of the malfunction eliminated 43 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing Wind deflector The wind deflector keeps air currents in the passenger compartment at alow level when the convertible top is down and provides for an even more pleasant journey at higher speeds Installation 1 Remove the wind deflector from the protec tive cover and unfold it arrows 1 2 Press together the top and bottom parts of the wind deflector until the catch engages arrow 2 3 Position both locking pins of one side at the openings provided for them 4 Press the wind deflector into the openings arrows 3 overcoming the tension in the springs and push the free locking pin in the same direction arrow 4 5 Position the free locking pins at the corre sponding openings and let the spring ten 44 sion lock the wind deflector in place arrow 6 Fold up the top section of the wind deflec tor arrow 6 With the wind deflector installed do not recline the front seat backrests too far if the seat is to be slid all the way back as this would damage the wind deflector lt Removing the wind deflector Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal lation Folding _ Za Ter A E o _ ES Lu R N Slide the red release lever towards the middle of the wind deflector and push the two halves apart Online Editi
270. setting The date entry Is stored To exit from the menu Select 45 and press the controller More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use refer also to Personal Profile on page To set the 12h 24h format refer to Setting the 12h 24h format 11 15 am SET Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the time and the word SET Press button 2 Use button 1 to set the hours Press button 2 to confirm the entry Use button 1 to set the minutes Press button 2 to confirm the entry Press button 2 The system accepts the new time iDrive for operating principle refer to page Press the MENU button once or twice until the start menu appears Communication AR Climate Navigation Entertainment Set time Time format Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Info sources Audio Display settings Display ob lt Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Turn the controller until Time Date is selected and press the controller VS Settings A Audio JA Display settings v Steering wheel buttons V2 Vehicle Tires v Langu
271. sor Press the button again arrow 3 The LED goes out Deactivate the rain sensor before enter Ing an automatic car wash Failure to do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation 4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps Pull the lever arrow 4 Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time When the vehicle lighting system is switched on the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield If you do your vision could be obscured Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid refer to Washer fluid Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty otherwise you will damage the washer pump 4 64 Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable Therefore keep it away from ignition sources and only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children otherwise there is a risk of personal injury Comply with the instructions on the con tainer lt Washer fluid filler neck Only refill washer fluid when the engine is cool to avoid contact with hot engine parts Otherwise fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety 4 SO 9 All
272. splayed on the Control Dis play gt The arrow or map view during destination guidance gt The destination list when destination guid ance is switched off Entering a destination manually The system s word matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns refer to page 135 This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly 123 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Navigation is selected and press the controller New destination is selected Press the controller a a lt SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WY Route pr ference gt Arrow ditolay i Select Enter address and press the con troller Select State Province or the country dis played and press the controller The list of available countries appears on the display ro Enter address Town City Street House number Intersection Select the country of destination and press the controller Atleast the town city of the destination or its zip code must be entered in order to start the des tination guidance From address book Ir UNITED STATES Town City Street House number Intersection The system also supports you with the follow ing fea
273. ss the controller to open the j menu 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Display oip lt gt Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date 141 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Turn the controller until Traffic Info set tings is selected and press the controller a v Settings i Vehicle Tires Lanquage Units Time Date BMW Service settings Bluetooth ler AUTO LOCAL 1 KBIG 104 low The traffic information can be received and displayed AUTO automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the best reception T Depending on the station either the sta tion name frequency local number or other information is displayed lt During destination guidance traffic information can be displayed in the arrow or map view If the symbol is shown with a red border traf fic information is available for the planned route 142 Select the symbol and press the controller T P re rer SUD hr STN Rije Mee pra A NI AB ER a TPS L i A e i hes AL ee ze L b Ia 7 a P _ a L n et a a in r EJ a a n oe odd oo i Bi 0 F T ta a i mr During destination guidance traffic information items along the planned route are indicated by yellow diamonds US 9 NORTHBOUND Traffic information
274. stest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle you will find this in the first chapter Should you sell your BMW some day please remember to hand over the Owner s Manual as well it is an important component of your vehi cle Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time Information on BMW e g on technical aspects can also be found on the Internet at www bmwusa com 4 Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle gt Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment lt Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion Indicates special equipment country spe cific equipment and optional extras as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing a Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions gt lt Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system Symbols on vehicle components Ti Indicates th
275. strongly EN alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets over 140 F 60 C otherwise dam age may occur lt 4 Outside sensors cameras gt Keep the sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle e g those of Park Distance Control clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully functional lt Interior care Upholstery cloth trim Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to remove superficial dirt To treat severe stains e g from beverages use a soft sponge or lint free microfiber cloth in combination with suitable interior cleaners Fol low the instructions on the packaging gt Clean the upholstery down to the seams _ using a sweeping motion Avoid strong rubbing lt Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers Ensure that Velcro fasteners are closed lt Leather leather trim D gt The leather used by BMW is a high quality natural product Slight irregularities in the leather are a typical characteristic of natural leather 4 Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely Therefore fre quently clean the leather of dust using acloth or vacuum cleaner In particular ensure that light colored leather is cleaned regularly as it has a tendency to soil more easily Treat the leather twice a year using a lea
276. sure that it is suitable for your BMW Check the following gt Dimensions of your vehicle refer to page 237 gt Ifnecessary fold in the exterior mirrors refer to page 52 V Maximum permissible tire width gt In convertibles do not treat the convertible top with wax Ensure that a program Is avail able that does not apply wax or is designed specifically for convertibles Preparations before driving into an automatic car wash gt Unscrew rod antenna gt Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin tentional activation of the wipers gt Remove additional attachments e g spoiler or telephone antennas if there is a possibility that they could be damaged Automatic transmission Before driving into an automatic car wash per form the following steps to ensure that the vehi cle can roll 1 Insert the remote control even with conve nient access into the ignition lock Engage transmission position N Release the parking brake Switch off the engine aS amp Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll Steam jets high pressure washers When using steam jets or high pressure washers ensure that you maintain suffi cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed a temperature of 140 F 60 C Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or 219 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Care temperature ca
277. t any time via iDrive You will be notified in time of any necessary 136 change of direction by means of spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrows am Press the key on which the desired destination has been stored refer also to page 0 2 mis SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET Select the m symbol and press the controller me This symbol indicates the current destina tion Select the current destination and press the controller MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY Wy Route preference Arrow gli splay Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 2 Select Stop guidance and press the con troller M Navigation Ad d to address book Information on destination Delete entry Delete fist Arf row H Ti ay If you did not reach the destination before the end of the last journey the following question will appear in the display at the start of the next journey Continue guidance to destination The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time To start destination guidance immediately Select Yes and press the controller Route display You can have the route during destination guid ance displayed in various ways From another menu you can switch directly to the screen last displayed refer to Convenient call up of menu items on page 18 4 Arrow display 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2
278. t signals 158 Select FM or AM and press the control ler SAT CO AUX Presets T KROO RHO HNIS Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top Select Autostore and press the controller Press the controller Other menu items are displayed Select Autostore H and press the con troller a ET FNM 4 Autostore The display of the digitally receivable stations is updated This can take up to 2 minutes With digital stations additional information on the current track can be displayed e g the name of the artist Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 1 Select the station and press the controller 2 Select Details and press the controller v 5 2 D p lt 4 Autostore 5 106 9 697 5 EY The information is displayed E FM 4 Autostore Detail info 89 9 Driving tips Elton John Rocket Man Best of Elton John AEM EL OLN When you change to another digitally received station any additional information is displayed after a brief interruption Communications Entertainment Mobility 5 cD i O Ge a 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Satellite radio Satellite radio You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality The channels are offered to you in predefined packages To receive the channel
279. tain foldable head restraints Folding down Press the button arrow 1 Folding up Pull the head restraint gt Only fold down the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear Fold up the head restraints again before transporting pas sengers in the rear lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Seat with manual longitudinal adjustment Convenient entry The convenient entry feature includes a mem ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle 1 Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward 2 Push the seat forward Previous position Push the seat backward and swing the backrest back When pushing the seat into its rearmost EN position make sure that no one is injured and that no objects are damaged Before driving off engage both seats and back rests so that they are locked in place Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment Convenient entry The convenient entry feature includes a mem ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle 1 Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward 2 Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position Previous position Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position and fold the backrest back If you release the switch before th
280. te _ Avoid tollraads Wf The route criterion is selected 5 If necessary select an additional route cri terion and then press the controller gt Dynamic route Automatic rerouting due to traffic obstructions Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction the guided route may lead through the traffic obstruction gt Avoid tollroads Toll roads are avoided as far as possible gt Avoid ferries Ferries are avoided as far as possible To exit from the menu Select the 4 3 arrow and press the controller The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map display Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 1 Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller 2 Select a route criterion and press the con troller D gt If the Avoid highways Avoid tollroads or Avoid ferries route criteria are selected route calculation may take consider ably longer 4 Word matching principle The system s word matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of towns or streets The system runs ongoing checks com paring your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response The benefits for you include gt Names of towns entered may differ from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another country Example Instead of the German spelling
281. te control battery 37 vehicle battery 227 Distance refer to Computer 69 Distance remaining to service refer to Service requirements 72 Distance to dest 70 Distance to destination refer to Computer 69 Distance warning refer to Park Distance Control PDC 81 Door key refer to Integrated key remote control 28 Door lock 32 Door lock confirmation signals 31 Door locks 30 32 73 Doors emergency operation 32 DOT Quality Grades 208 Draft free ventilation 100 Drinks holders refer to Cup holders 107 Drive for navigation DVD 150 Drive off assistance refer to DSC 82 Drive off assistant 83 Driving around a traffic congestion 144 Driving lamps refer to Parking lamps low beams 92 Driving notes 114 Driving off on hills refer to Drive off assistant 83 Driving route refer to Displaying route 137 Driving stability control systems 82 Driving through water 116 Driving tips refer to Driving notes 114 Dry air refer to Cooling function 100 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 82 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 83 indicator lamps 83 DVD drive for navigation DVD 150 DVD for navigation 122 Dynamic Brake Control DBC 82 Dynamic route in navigation 134 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82 Dynamic Traction Control DTC indicator lamps 83 E EBV Electronic brake force distribution 82 Eject button refer to Buttons on the CD player 150 Electrical malfunction door lock 32
282. te control into ignition switch 2 Depress the brake 3 Move the selector lever to position N 4 Switch off the engine The vehicle can roll Malfunctions Convenient access may malfunction due to local radio waves If this happens open and close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key To start the engine afterward insert the remote control into the ignition switch Warning lamps gi The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to Start the engine the engine cannot be started The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked If necessary insert another remote control into the ignition switch y The warning lamp in the instrument 7 cluster lights up while the engine is running the remote control is no longer inside the vehicle After the engine is switched off the engine can only be restarted within approx 10 seconds The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message _ appears on the Control Display replace the battery in the remote control ir e tea mur e O Replacing the battery The remote control for convenient access con tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time 1 Take the integrated key out of the remote control refer to page 28 2 Remove the cover 3
283. ted The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Wiper system ir e L mur e O 1 Switching on wipers 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe 3 Activating deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor 4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps 5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen sitivity of the rain sensor Switching on wipers Press the lever upward arrow 1 The lever automatically returns to its initial posi tion when released Normal wiper speed Press once The system switches to operation in the inter mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor the intermittent wipe time is a preset If the car is equipped with a rain sensor the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield directly in front of the interior rearview mirror 63 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Driv Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor on Press the button arrow 3 The LED in the but ton lights up Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn the thumb wheel 5 Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sen
284. ted but an instruc tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con trol Display The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system This infor mation is indicated on the DVD label you request the current position of your vehicle but do not receive a precise dis play The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions your current position is not yet available on your navigation DVD or the system is in the process of calculating your current position As a rule reception is guaranteed when you are in the open the destination guidance does not accept a destination The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded Choose a destination as close as possible to the orig inal one the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name On the navigation DVD no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered Enter any street or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town and then start the destination guid ance you want to enter a destination for the des tination guidance but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded In this case the system will not offer you any let ters to choose from Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one the system stops f
285. ted dis tance remaining to the next oil service refer to page 217 Have the system checked as soon as possible Adding engine oil ig Do not add 1 US quart 1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Con trol Display A Add oil within the next 125 miles 200 km otherwise the engine could be dam aged lt Keep oils greases etc out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant warnings on the containers Otherwise health hazards may result 4 Oil change Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel Specified engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine BMW continuously approves spe cific oils after confirming their suitability for use In its vehicles with extensive testing Do not use oil additives as these may cause engine damage 4 Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes Only use oils with the API SM specification or higher gt Your BMW center will be glad to answer _ any questions regarding BMW High Per formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils 4 You can also call BMW of North America at 1 800 831 1117 or visit the website www bomwusa
286. ter starting the destination guidance the planned route is shown on the map 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top Turn the controller until the desired map display is selected gt Map facing north gt Map direction of travel gt Perspective i M Navigation New destination te SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY W Route preference Map direction of gt 3 Press the controller 138 HEVEteL Y HILLS a WEST HOLLYWOOD Switching voice instructions on off Starting stopping destination guidance Map guided destination selection mh ON Displaying the menu in which the informa tion last selected can be shown hidden refer to Selecting destination using infor mation page 129 5 Changing map display gt An Map facing north gt Y Map direction of travel gt 7 Perspective 6 Changing route criteria 7 Calling up traffic information manually 8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies The projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the bottom line of the Control Display To exit from the menu Select the 44 arrow and press the controller At scales of less than 250 miles 500 km you can have the map shown facing north or toward your current direction of travel or in perspec tive At scales of 250 miles 500 km or greater the map is always north oriented
287. th information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Break in period Moving parts need breaking in time to adjust to each other Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits Up to 1 200 miles 2 000 km Drive at varying engine and road speeds but do not exceed an engine speed of 4500 rpm ora road speed of 100 mph 160 km h Avoid full throttle operation and use of the transmission s kick down mode After driving 1 200 miles 2 000 km Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial break in period Therefore drive cautiously during the first 200 miles 300 km Brake system Brakes require an initial break in period of approx 300 miles 500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors Drive cautiously during this break in period Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx 300 miles 500 km During this break in period engage the clutch gently 114 Following part replacement
288. the appropriate button on the steering wheel If you have programmed Navigation voice instructions for one of the buttons gt Switch voice instructions on off Press the button for a longer period gt To repeat the last voice instruction Press the button briefly gt To cancela voice instruction during an announcement Press the button briefly 54 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Transporting children safely The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the EN vehicle otherwise they could endanger themselves and or other persons by opening the doors for example lt Children always in the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft 150 cm may be transported only in the rear in suitable child restraint systems appropriate for their age weight and size Oth erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident 4 Children 13 years of age or older must be buck led in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child restraint system that is appropriate for their age size and weight Exception for front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat the front and side airbags for the front pas senger must be deactivated Otherwise a child traveling on that seat will face a significant
289. the controller to activate or deac tivate the link J Bluetooth Settings LY The Bluetooth link is activated J The Bluetooth link is deactivated Adjusting volume Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume This volume for the hands free system is main tained even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use m c E E e O Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions using iDrive gt Accepting rejecting calls gt Dialing phone numbers gt Selecting phone numbers from the phone book 181 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Refueling Refueling FN Always switch off the engine before refu eling otherwise fuel cannot be added to the tank and a message will be displayed lt Take all precautionary measures and EN observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel Do not carry any spare fuel con tainers in your vehicle They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident lt Fuel filler door Opening s 1 Open fuel filler door To do so light
290. the order of the mobile phones on the list As long as a mobile phone from this list is selected you cannot operate the mobile phones via the vehicle iDrive for operating principle refer to page 1 Press the MENU button to call up the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller Select Bluetooth and press the controller Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top select Phone and press the controller Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller F Bluetooth i Phone Pair new phone Phones previously paired Handy 2 Select Move device up and press the con troller i 7 Bluetooth Fhone t Delete device Cell phone 1 Cell phone 2 The selected mobile phone moves up one posi tion on the list 180 Should you no longer wish to operate a mobile phone via the vehicle you can delete the mobile phone s pairing data iDrive for operating principle refer to page Switch off the mobile phone Press the MENU button to call up the start menu Press the controller to open the menu Select Settings and press the controller Select Bluetooth and press the controller Bluetooth is selected Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top select Phone and press the controller Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller F Bluetooth i PRANE Pair new
291. the rear is severely limited during the procedure Do not operate the con vertible top while driving in windy conditions Do not drive faster than 30 mph 50 km h other wise damage to the vehicle can occur 4 LEDs gt While the convertible top is being operated the left LED lights up green It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed In the following situations a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up gt If the right hand LED flashes red when you release the button the opening or closing action has not yet finished gt Ifthe right hand LED lights up red when the button is pressed the cargo bay partition is raised the luggage compartment lid is not closed or there is a malfunction The con vertible top cannot be moved Interruption The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for the convertible top operation is released The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the buttons If the opening or closing procedure is inter rupted for an extended period the convertible top remains in the raised position for approx 10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable position FN convertible top that is not fully opened or closed is a safety hazard lt gt If the convertible top is not fully opened or closed the luggage compartment lid can not be opened and the windows cannot
292. the recess and fold down the cover To stabilize the cover in the folded down position place the cen ter panel underneath it 3 Open the Velcro fastener spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach 109 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter 4 Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag opening After loading secure the ski bag and its con tents Tighten the retaining strap on the ten sioning buckle for this purpose Secure the ski bag in the manner described otherwise it could endanger the car s occupants e g in case of heavy brak ing or Sudden swerving 4 To store the ski bag perform the steps described for loading in reverse order Removing the ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed e g for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts 110 1 Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest 2 Pull the handle arrow 1 3 Pull out the insert arrow 2 gt For more information on the various inserts available contact your BMW cen ter lt Convertible through loading opening with integrated transport bag The transport bag is designed for safe clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards With the transport bag you can stow skis up t
293. the second terminal clamp of the plus jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 4 Attach one terminal clamp of the minus jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole 5 Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus jumper cable to the negative termi nal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started Starting the engine 1 Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed 2 Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way If the first start attempt is not successful wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge 3 Let the engines run for a few minutes 4 Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence If necessary have the battery checked and recharged gt Never use spray fluids to start the 1 engine Tow starting towing away Observe the applicable laws and regula tions for tow starting and towing vehi cles 4 Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed 4 Using a tow fitting The screw in tow fitting must always be carried i
294. ther lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather s protective layer Carpets cargo bay You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled The floor mats can be removed for cleaning When replacing the mats ensure that the seat rails do not extend over the floor mats as this may damage the mats Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical rea sons and can be removed by vacuuming repeatedly 221 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Care Interior plastic parts gt Imitation leather surfaces gt Lamp glasses gt Display pane of instrument cluster gt Matt parts Clean with water and solvent free plastic cleaner if necessary Fine wood parts Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a damp cloth Wipe dry with a soft cloth Safety belts Do not clean with cleaning agents as these may destroy the fabric 4 Interior sensors cameras To clean interior sensors and cameras e g of the High Beam Assistant use a lint free cloth moistened with glass cleaner Displays To clean the displays e g of the radio or instru ment cluster use a display cleaning cloth or a soft non abrasive lint free cloth FN Avoid applying excessive pressure when cleaning the displays otherwise damage may occur lt Do not use chemical or abrasive house hold cleaning agents Keep all types of fluid
295. tible gt Position heavy objects as low and as far for ward as possible ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests gt Cover sharp edges and corners gt For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle Securing cargo o Ai gt Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining straps a cargo bay net or draw straps gt Heavy duty cargo straps for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center To attach the cargo straps there are two lashing eyes arrows 1 on the inside wall of the cargo bay Depend ing on your vehicle s equipment there may be two additional lashing eyes arrows 2 on the cargo bay sidewalls Follow the information included with the cargo straps Always position and secure the cargo as described above so that it cannot endan ger the car s occupants for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle 118 weight or either of the approved axle loads refer to page 239 as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard and may also place you in viola tion of traffic safety laws Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car since they could be thrown around for example as a result of heavy braking sudden swerves etc and endanger the occu pants Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing eyes shown in the illustration Do
296. till be heard by the BMW Assist Response Center however Under certain conditions an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident This Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by the button being pressed For technical reasons the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed for the most unfavorable conditions 4 Roadside Assistance The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to assist you around the clock in the event of a breakdown including on weekends and public holidays The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis tance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist you can establish contact with BMW Roadside Assis tance for breakdown assistance directly via iDrive refer to page 192 gt z O 229 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG istance iving and receiving ass G First aid pouch Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life Therefore check the expiration dates of the contents reg ularly and replace any items in good time if nec essary The first aid pouch is located on the right hand side of the cargo bay in a storage area Warning triangle i mi The warning triangle is located in a holder in the luggage compartment lid Press the tabs to take it out Jump starting If the car s own battery is flat your BMW s engi
297. tion 137 Ashtray 107 Assist 191 Assistance systems refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82 Assist profile 197 AUC Automatic recirculated air control 99 Audio 153 157 Audio 150 controls 150 switching on off 150 tone control 151 volume 151 Audio refer to Tone control 151 Automatic air distribution 99 air flow rate 99 BMW Teleservice Call 193 cruise control 65 headlamp control 92 storing of stations 155 Automatic car wash refer to Car wash 116 Automatic car washes 219 Automatic climate control 97 automatic air distribution 99 settings via iDrive 98 Automatic curb monitor 52 Automatic lamps refer to Welcome lamps 92 Automatic programs with automatic climate control 99 Automatic recirculated air control AUC 99 Automatic station search 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Automatic transmission with Steptronic 60 interlock 61 selector lever lock 61 shiftlock 61 towing 231 tow starting 231 Automatic ventilation for parked car ventilation 101 AUTO program for automatic climate control 99 Auto Request 193 Autostore on the radio 156 AUX 150 169 171 AUX In port 169 USB audio interface 170 AUX In port 169 Average fuel consumption 69 setting the units 71 Average speed 69 Avoid ferries in navigation 134 Avoid highways in navigation 13
298. tions a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident If possible the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you gt Enhanced Roadside Assistance You can call BMW Roadside Assistance should you require help in the event of a breakdown If possible the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call gt Customer Relations For all information related to your vehicle you can be connected with BMW Customer Relations gt BMW TeleServices Data on your vehicle s service status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center either automatically before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment gt Remote Door Unlock Contact the BMW Assist Response Center if your remote control or key is not available and you would like to have the vehicle unlocked gt Stolen Vehicle Recovery After you report your vehicle stolen with the police call the BMW Assist Response Cen ter to determine its position In addition optional services can be provided to you such as the Concierge service or informa tion on directions traffic or the weather You can use Critical Calling to activate a limited number of calls via the BMW Assist Response Center e g when you do not have your mobile phone with you Press the SOS button in order to contact the BMW Assist Response Center see below 191 Online Editio
299. tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi cle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either sep arately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure lt 4 RSC Run Flat Tires You will recognize Run Flat Tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire refer to page 210 M S Winter and all season tires These have better winter properties than sum mer tires XL Designation for specially reinforced tires Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread Check the tread depth Minimum tread depth The tire tread depth should not be below 1 8 in 3 mm At tread depths below 1 8 in 3 mm there is an increased risk of high speed hydroplaning even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface The tread depth should not drop below 1 8 in 3 mm although for example European legisla tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 1 16 in 1 6 mm At tread depths below 1 8
300. to page 1 You can dial the displayed service numbers if your mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle iDrive for operating principle refer to page Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forwards to select Communication 185 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select BMW Contact and press the con troller Phone BMW Contact Numbers Roadside Assistance Service Request Customer Relations Select BMW Contact Numbers and press the controller BMW Contact Roadside Assistance Service Request Customer Relations Select one of the following menu items and press the controller Roadside Assistance Customer Relations Service Request Select Call and press the controller Contact will be established Touch tone dialing is required for access to network services or for controlling devices e g for remote querying on an answering machine This function is available whenever there is a connection 186 Establish connection TT Phone 4 Active calls Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected Select the desired touch tone character and press the controller Each selection is transmitted immediately and is confirmed by a tone depending on the type of mobile phone you are using T 1234567894 ABCDEFGHUKLMN 4 Keypad You can continue ongoing calls outside of the v
301. to the convertible top gt When opening a wet top e g after driving in the rain water may drip into the cargo bay If necessary remove items from the cargo bay beforehand to avoid water stains or soil ing At temperatures below 14 F 10 C do not move the convertible top or damage may occur Do not keep the convertible top in the convert ible top box for longer than one day if it is wet otherwise the moisture may cause damage Do not place objects on the convertible top as otherwise they may fall off when you operate the convertible top and cause damage or injury Never move the convertible top when the roll over protection system is in the activated posi tion Always fully complete a convertible top move ment Driving with the convertible top incom pletely opened or closed can result in damage or injury Do not reach into the mechanism during the opening or closing procedure Keep children away from the opening closing path of the con vertible top For safety reasons only move the convertible top when the vehicle is stationary if possible 4 A The convertible top swings upward when opening and closing When operating the convertible top in a garage under a bridge etc ensure that there are at least 6 ft 7 in 2 m of headroom otherwise the vehicle may be dam aged lt Before opening and closing gt Comply with the safety precautions described above gt Ensure that the cargo bay partition is folded
302. tore and execute certain iDrive functions gt Navigation destinations gt Entertainment gt Radio stations gt CD gt CD compartment of CD changer gt AUX gt Telephone phone numbers The assignment of the programmable memory keys is stored for the remote control currently in use Storing functions Navigation destinations 1 Select the navigation destination e g in the destination list or address book 2 m Press the key longer than 2 seconds Special features of the Professional navigation system gt If destination guidance and the map view have been started the current destination is stored gt Ifthe destination is entered via map the coordinates in the cross hairs are stored not the current destination Telephone phone numbers 1 Enter the phone number or select the num ber from alist of stored phone numbers e g the A Z list 2 m Press the key longer than 2 seconds If the phone number is associated with a name the name is also stored Entertainment The item stored in the Entertainment menu is the source that is playing at the time of storage 21 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ae e G p lt iDrive e g aradio station irrespective of what was selected on the Control Display 1 Select the desired function e g radio sta tion or CD 2 a Press the key longer than 2 seconds gt If the ca
303. tures If you do not enter a street the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city You can skip the entry of country and local ity if the current entries should be retained for your new destination 124 Select Town City or the town city dis played and press the controller Select the starting letter and press the con troller A list of all towns cities starting with this let ter appears on the Control Display Delete letters if necessary A Ey beth KR WY Town City BADGER UNINC TULARE COUNTY BAKER UNINC SAN BERNARDINO COU BAKERSFIELD BALDWIN PARK To delete individual numbers or letters Move the controller towards the right to select and press the controller To delete all numbers or letters Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller for a longer period Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG 4 Ifnecessary enter more letters Entering destination by zip code The list gradually grows smaller each time 1 Select Town City and press the control you enter a new letter ler gt To enter spaces if necessary 2 Enter the zip code Select the _ symbol and press the con Select the desired digits and press the con troller troller iaf VWXYZ 012345677 9AOU vE Town City Town City Beverly Essex MA Beverly Randolph WV Beverly Glen Los Angeles CA Beverly
304. ubstantial loss of tire pres sure in the indicated tire A message appears on the Control Display All wheels yellow There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres sure in several tires A message appears on the Control Display Gray The system cannot detect a puncture Possible reasons for this gt TPM is being reset gt Temporary malfunction caused by systems or devices using the same radio frequency gt Malfunction Resetting the system Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed reset the system lt 4 iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 86 3 Select Settings and press the controller Display op lt gt Info sources Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Ss Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until TPM is selected and press the con troller PDC Lighting Status TPM active 6 Start the engine but do not start driving 7 Select Reset and press the controller 8 Select Yes and press the controller fam TPM Reset TPM ING Status TPM active 9 Start to drive The wheels are shown in gray and Reset ting TPM is d
305. un Flat Tires 210 Runflat System Component RSC refer to Run Flat Tires 210 Run Flat Tires 210 continuing driving with a damaged tire 85 flat tire 85 new tires 210 remaining driving distance refer to Indication of a flat tire 85 tire inflation pressure 204 winter tires 211 Runflat Tyres refer to Run Flat Tires 210 S Safety belt height adjustment 51 Safety belts 51 damage 51 indicator lamp 51 reminder 51 sitting safely 45 Safety systems airbags 89 Antilock Brake System ABS 82 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82 rollover protection system convertible 90 safety belts 51 Safety tires refer to Run Flat Tires 210 SAT 150 160 Satellite radio 160 displaying additional information 161 enabling 160 selecting channel 161 storing channel 161 Saving fuel 114 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Scan sampling radio stations 155 sampling tracks on CD 165 Scan CD changer 165 CD player 165 radio 155 Scan all for audio mode 165 Scan directory for audio mode 165 Screen refer to iDrive 16 Screw thread for tow fitting 231 SDARS refer to Satellite radio 160 Seat and mirror memory 49 Seat belt reminder refer to Fasten safety belts reminder 51 Seats 45 heating 49 sitting safely 45 Securing cargo 110 111 Select as destination 130 195 Sel
306. ur 4 Fuel specifications Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel as this would cause permanent damage to the Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG catalytic converter Do not fill the tank with E85 i e fuel containing 85 ethanol nor with FlexFuel Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be dam aged lt Required fuel Super Premium Gasoline AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended However you may also use gasoline with less AKI The minimum AKI Rating is gt 128i 87 gt 1351 89 If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures This has no effect on the engine life A Do not use any gasoline below the speci d fied minimum fuel grade Otherwise the engine could be damaged lt Use high quality brands Field experience has indicated significant dif ferences in fuel quality volatility composition additives etc among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada Fuels contain ing up to and including 10 ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2 8 oxygen by weight that is 15 MTBE or 3 methanol plus an equivalent amount of co solvent will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship The use of poor quality fuels may result in driveability starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental condi tio
307. ur USB device against physical damage To play audio tracks over the vehicle s loud speaker system connect the USB device to port 2 After the device is connected for the first time the information on all tracks e g artist type of music and the playlists are transferred from the USB device to the vehicle This procedure may take some time The duration depends on the USB device and the number of tracks During transfer you can select the tracks using the directories and file names After transfer you can call up the tracks using the information and playlists Information from up to four USB devices or for about 20 000 tracks can be stored on the vehi cle If a fifth USB device is connected and if more than 20 000 tracks are to be stored the infor mation on existing tracks may be lost Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management DRM cannot be played lt 4 Starting audio playback Via iDrive If the audio device has a device name the name is displayed 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to call up Entertainment Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG If necessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until AUX is selected and press the con troller FM AM SAT CD AUX 1N USE Set External audio source Select USB or the name of the audio device and press the controller
308. urface so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied lt 115 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG N Q D gt m Things to remember when driving The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin ing tread depth on the tires refer also to Mini mum tread depth on page 209 Driving through water Drive through water on the road only if itis not deeper than 1 ft 30 cm and then only at walking speed at the most Otherwise the vehicle s engine the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged 4 Use the parking brake on inclines On inclines do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch use the parking brake instead Otherwise greater clutch wear will result 4 For more information about the drive off assis tant refer to page 83 Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort Pulsation of the brake pedal combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles Monitor traffic conditions to ensure th
309. urn the controller until the desired setting is selected You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as Treble Bass O par oon O Par LLI gt Balance left right volume distribution gt Fader front rear volume distribution The speed dependent volume control auto matically increases the volume with increasing driving speed You can set various stages for the increase in volume 151 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Speed volume and press the con troller You can choose between stereo and multichan nel playback surround lalss Balance Fader Select Surround Settings and press the Speed dependent volume controller Select Stereo or Surround J Surround Settings surround Turn the controller The adjustment is applied the field can be changed You can select a spatial sound effect that improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency You can set individual sound frequency ranges ranges Select Equalizer and press the controller Select Surround Settings and press the o Se controller EUT Surround Settings ji LITT 100 200 500 1K 2K Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range Select Concert hall or Theater 248 Surround Settings 1 JM Equalizer Theater 100 200 35001 1K Turn the controller until the
310. urnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec tions You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga 146 tion DVD Instead of an arrow indicating a turn you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route the navigation system does not react to entries If the battery was disconnected it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 e y S 01 U09 sdi Bulag uoneBiaenN auowuiey1aju suoneoiunwuwos Ayyiqo w Pre 147 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 0 _ tt _ Entertainment Operation of the radio CD equipment and external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG On off and settings On off and settings The following audio sources have shared con trols and setting options gt Radio gt CD player gt CD changer Controls The audio sources can be operated using gt Buttons near the CD player gt iDrive gt Buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 gt Programmable memory keys refer to page 21 Buttons
311. ut specifying a town city In this case all streets of the same name in the designated country are offered The corresponding town city is displayed after the street name Ifa town city has already been entered you can negate this entry This could be helpful in instances where the desired street does not exist in the entered town city because it belongs to another suburb for example Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field The 4 3 arrow is selected 2 BEVERLY HILLS ABC DEF GHIJKL MNO PQR STU VW 1 Street ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA FI ALOBURY CT 126 Turn the controller to the right until you see a request to enter a street in the country then press the controller Enter street name in CALIFORNIA ABC DEF GHIJKL MNO PQR STU VW 41 Street ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA PI ALDBURY CT Switch to the second field from the top and enter the street You can enter any house number stored for the street on the navigation DVD Select House number and press the con troller To enter the house number Select the desired digits and press the con troller Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller i Enter address REXFORD DRIVE 455 Intersection Add to destination list Select Start guidance and press the con troller Destination guidance starts immed
312. ve 16 adjusting brightness 80 automatic climate control 98 changing date and time 75 changing language 80 confirming selection or entry 19 displays menus 17 lists 19 menu guidance 17 operating principle 16 selecting a menu item 19 status information 20 switching menu pages 19 symbols 18 Ignition 58 switched off 58 switched on 58 Ignition key refer to Integrated key remote control 28 Ignition key position 1 refer to Radio readiness 58 Ignition key position 2 refer to Ignition on 58 Ignition lock 58 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Imprint 2 Indicator and warning lamps 13 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 87 Indicator lighting refer to Instrument lighting 95 Individually programmable buttons on steering wheel 53 Individual settings refer to Personal Profile 28 Inflation pressure tires 204 Inflation pressure monitoring refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85 Information on another location 129 on country 129 on current position 129 on destination location 129 Information on destination 131 Info sources 73 Initializing compass refer to Calibrating 106 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84 Input map 128 Installation location CD changer 167 Instructions for navigation system refer to Voice instructions 140 Instrument cluster 12 Instrument lighting 95
313. vehicle Calling up communication Many of the functions described below are con trolled using the Communication menu iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 182 1 Press the MENU button to call up the start menu Communication we Navigation Climate Entertainment 2 Move the controller forwards to call up Communication Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num ber has been transmitted the name of the entry is displayed Accepting a call Press the gf button on the steering wheel Alternatively Accept is selected Press the controller aol Incoming call ftttr fi Reject Rejecting a call Select Reject and press the controller The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Select Phone and press the controller BMW Assist Dial 0123456769 fABCDEFGHIJKL i Number Select Dial and press the controller Enter the desired phone number by select ing the digits individually and pressing the controller Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code area code and phone number The letters correspond to the numbers on the keypad of the mobile phone To delete the last digit Move the controller towards the right to select the arrow and press the control ler S
314. venience are described here Opening and closing Opening and closing Remote control Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries charge status In cars with convenient access the remote control contains a replace able battery refer to page 37 The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car refer to Per sonal Profile below In addition information about service require ments is stored in the remote control refer to Service data in the remote control page 217 Integrated key Press button 1 to release the key The integrated key fits the following locks gt Driver s door refer to page 32 gt Convertible glove compartment refer to page 106 28 gt Luggage compartment lid refer to page 33 New remote controls Your BMW center can supply new remote con trols with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss Personal Profile The concept You can set many of your BMW s functions to suit your personal needs and preferences Without any action on your part Personal Pro file ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use When you unlock the
315. ver from the onboard tool kit refer to page 223 press the red lever see arrow while moving the selector lever to the desired position Turn signals headlamp flasher 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Turn signals Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point To turn off manually press the lever to the resistance point Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG gt Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp and the turn signals indicates that one of the turn signal bulbs has failed 4 Indicating a turn briefly Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn Triple turn signal activation Press the lever as far as the resistance point The turn signals flash three times You can activate or deactivate this function iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Ifnecessary move the highlight marker to the uppermost field Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller A Doorlocks FIM b lt O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps 240 5 Pathway lighting O Welcome light 6 Select Triple turn signal and press the controller TY Triple turn signaling is activa
316. washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze according to manufacturer s recom mendations Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure the correct concentration is maintained lt Capacity Approx 6 3 US quarts 6 liters Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG Cruise control The concept You can use the cruise control feature begin ning at approx 20 mph 30 km h The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column Do not use cruise control when driving at EN constant speed is prevented by adverse conditions e g winding roads dense traffic or poor road conditions due to e g snow rain ice or loose surfaces Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result 4 One lever for all functions 1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat Ing 2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler ating 3 Deactivating cruise control 4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand Maintaining current speed Tap the lever arrow 1 or pull it briefly arrow 2 The car s current speed is stored and main tained It is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster If the engine braking power is insufficient on a downhill slope the set speed may be exceeded On uphill gradients it may prove impossible to maint
317. witch on the desired operating mode by pressing this button repeatedly gt LED off outside air flows in continuously gt Left hand LED on AUC mode a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air If nec essary the system blocks the supply of out side air and recirculates the inside air As soon as the concentration of pollutants in the outside air has decreased sufficiently the system automatically switches back to outside air supply gt Right hand LED on recirculated air mode the supply of outside air is permanently 99 Online Edition for Part no 01 410014954 02 08 BMW AG LL e tea mur e O Climate shut off The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces during operation in the recirculated air mode you should switch it off while also increasing the air flow rate as required The recirculated air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods otherwise the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate lt Via the button on the steering wheel You can use an individually programmable but ton on the steering wheel refer to page 53 to select between the different modes Residual heat The heat stored in the engine Is used to heat the passenger com partment e g while stopped at a The function can be switched on when the fol lowing conditions are met s
318. y Thigh support Pull the lever and move the thigh support for ward or back Electrical adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per sonal protection lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Shs rsp 4 5 z fi Ci EL v2 p 1 gt 1 Longitudinal direction 2 Height 3 Angle rll a A 4 Backrest The head restraints are adjusted manually refer to Head restraints on page 47 Lumbar support You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region The upper hips and spinal column receive sup plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed upright sitting position gt Increase or decrease curvature press the switch at the front or rear respectively gt Shift curvature up or down press the switch at the top or bottom respectively Backrest width amp gt ir e tea mur e O You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lat eral support pads Press the front or rear end of the switch Backrest width decreases or increases accord ingly To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats with the door open press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch Head restraints correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event
319. y manually 155 station search 155 stations with best reception 155 storing stations 156 switching on off 150 tone control 151 volume 151 Radio position refer to Radio readiness 58 Radio readiness 58 switched off 58 switched on 58 Rain sensor 63 Random refer to Random play 166 Random all for audio mode 167 Random directory for audio mode 167 Random play 166 RDS Radio Data System 157 Reading lamps 96 Rear fog lamps replacing bulb 226 Rear lamps refer to Tail lamps 225 Rear mounted luggage rack 119 Rear seats adjusting head restraints 48 folding down backrests 108 Rearview mirror refer to Mirrors 51 Rear window defroster 100 Received calls 184 254 Receiving level of mobile phone refer to Status information 20 Recirculated air mode 99 Recirculation of air refer to Recirculated air mode 99 Recording times refer to Stopwatch 79 Redial on the mobile phone 184 Reflectors refer to Tail lamps 225 Refueling 202 Releasing hood 212 Remaining distance refer to Computer 69 Remaining distance refer to Cruising range 69 Remote control 28 battery renewal 37 convenient access 36 garage door opener 103 luggage compartment lid 30 malfunctions 31 37 removing from the ignition lock 58 service data 217 Remote control key refer to Integrated key remote control 28 Repeat directory for
320. y shift with the Steptronic refer to page 61 Vehicle parking To prevent the vehicle from rolling always select position P and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running 4 Disengaging the remote control In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine interlock Removing the remote control from the ignition lock refer to page 58 Selector lever positions PRNDM S Online Edition for Part no 01 41 0 014 954 02 08 BMW AG Displays in the instrument cluster PRNDDS M1 to M6 The selector lever position is displayed or the current gear in the manual mode Changing selector lever positions gt With the ignition switched on or the engine running the selector lever can be moved out of position P interlock gt Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary first depress the brake otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move shiftlock To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position depress the brake until you are ready to start lt Sy A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag ing selector lever positions R and P To cancel the lock press the button on the front of the selector lever see arrow P Park Select this only when the vehicle is stationary The drive wheels are locked R Reverse Select this only when th

BMW 135i Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents